Home

Sepam series 40 - ElectricalManuals.net

1. m turn the generator on m when applicable apply a V N voltage set to the rated secondary phase to neutral voltage of the VT i e Vns Uns v3 m inject an current set to 5 A and when applicable in phase with the V N voltage applied i e generator phase displacement a V N 0 m use the SFT2841 software to check the following the value indicated for the measured IO residual current is approximately equal to 5A when applicable the value indicated for calculated VO residual voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vnp Unp V3 when applicable the value indicated for the phase displacement 0 VO 10 between the 10 current and VO voltage is approximately equal to 0 m turn the generator off 3 DEL 7 29 Commissioning Description Check to be carried out when the residual voltage is delivered by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected in an open delta assembly and when the residual current is calculated in Sepam or when applicable is not used for the protection function current test erminal box single phase or 3 phase generator 7 30 Checking of residual voltage input connection Procedure m connect according to the diagram below o the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box so as to only supply Sepam s residual voltage input o when
2. The content of the address 1E80h 2080h may be read using a Modbus read word operation function 3 The function code field may have the following values m 01h to 99h BCD encoding for protection functions The unit number field is used as follows m for protection functions it indicates the unit involved varying from 1 to N N being the maximum number of relays available in the Sepam m when only one unit of a protection function is available this number field is not controlled Exception replies In addition to the usual cases Sepam can send Modbus type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if another remote reading reguest is being processed Reply frame The reply sent back by Sepam fits into a zone with a maximum length of 25 words at the address 1E00h or 2000h which comprises the following 1E00h 1E7Ch 2000h 207Ch B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 Function code Bog B08 B07 BO6 BO5 B04 BO3 Unit number B02 B01 BOO Settings This zone is read by a Modbus read word operation function 3 at the address 2000h The length of the exchange may concern m first word only validity test m maximum size of the zone 125 mots m usable size of the zone determined by the function being addressed However reading must always begin at the first word in the zone any other address triggers an
3. Signal Event Label on lamp front panel LED 1 Tripping of protection 50 51 unit 1 I gt 51 LED 2 Tripping of protection 50 51 unit 2 I gt gt 51 LED 3 Tripping of protection 50N 51N unit 1 lo gt 51N LED4 Tripping of protection 50N 51N unit 2 lo gt gt 51N LED 5 Ext LED 6 LED 7 Circuit breaker open 111 0 off LED 8 Circuit breaker closed 112 lon LED9 Tripping by circuit breaker control Trip 1 Assignment by default with MES114 The default parameter setting may be personalized using the SFT2841 software m the assignment of signal lamps to events is to be defined in the control matrix screen LEDs tab m editing and printing of personalized labels are proposed in the Sepam menu 8 DE 4 17 MT11186 Control and monitoring functions SFT2841 control matrix Control matrix The control matrix is used for simple assignment of the logic outputs and signal lamps to information produced by the protection units program logic and logic inputs Each column creates a logic OR between all the lines selected The matrix may also be used to display the alarms connected to the information It guarantees the consistency of the parameter setting with the predefined functions wee sn zar mra re rina The following data are managed in the control matrix and may be set using the SFT2841 software tool Protections button All of the application protection functions Control functions button
4. Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Series 20 Ab 25 C Series 40 Ad Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068 2 2 Series 20 Bb 70 C Series 40 Bd Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068 2 3 Ca 10 days 93 RH 40 C Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068 2 14 Nb 25 C to 70 C 5 C min Salt mist IEC 60068 2 52 Kb 2 Influence of corrosion IEC 60068 2 60 C 21 days 75 RH 25 C 0 5 ppm H S 1 ppm SO Gaz test 4 IEC 60068 2 60 21 days 75 RH 25 C 0 01 ppm H S 0 2 ppm SO 0 02 ppm NOs 0 01 ppm Cl In storage 4 Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Ab 25 C Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068 2 2 Bb 70 C Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068 2 3 Ca 56 days 93 RH 40 C Enclosure safety tests Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels closed except for rear panel IP20 NEMA Type 12 with gasket supplied Fire withstand Electrical safety tests 1 2 50 us impulse wave IEC 60695 2 11 IEC 60255 5 650 C with glow wire 5 kv 2 Power frequency dielectric withstand IEC 60255 5 2kV 1 mn 9 CE Harmonized standard European directives EN 50263 m 89 336 CEE Electromagnetic Comptability EMC Directive o 92 31 CEE Amendment O 93 68 CEE Amendment m 73 23 CEE Low Voltage Directive O 93 68 CEE Amendment UL Tia UL508 CSA C22 2 n 14 95 File E212533 CSA CSA C22 2 n 14 95 n 94 M91 n 0 17 00 File 210625 1 Sepam series
5. 7 6 SFT2841 setting and operating software Use of the software Connected to Sepam mode Precaution When a laptop is used given the risks inherent to the accumulation of static electricity the customary precaution consists of discharging in contact with an earthed metal frame before phsycially connecting the CCA783 cord Plugging into Sepam m plugging of the 9 pin connector SUB D type into one of the PC communication ports Configuration of the PC communciation port via the Communication port function in the Options menu m plugging of the 6 pin connector into the connector round minidin type situated behind the blanking plate on the front panel of Sepam or the DSM303 module Connection to Sepam 2 possibilities for setting up the connection between SFT2841 and Sepam m Connection function in the File menu m choice of connect to the Sepam at the start up of SFT2841 Once the connection with Sepam has been established Connected appears in the status bar and the Sepam connection window may be accessed in the work zone User identification The window intended for the entry of the 4 digit password is activated m via the Passwords tab m via the Identification function in the Sepam menu m via the Identification icon eo The Return to Operating mode function in the Passwords tab removes access rights to parameter and protection setting mode Downloading of parameters and protection settings
6. L1 L2 L3 PREMA m 0 ACE917 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 8 Input Lih L2 L3 ki Single phase or 3 phase generator A 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Commissioning Description Check to be carried out when the residual current is measured by a specific sensor such as m CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT m CSH30 interposing ring CT whether it is installed on the secondary circuit of a single 1 A or 5 A CT which encompasses the 3 phases or on the neutral connection of the three 1 A or 5 A phase CTs m other core balance CT connected to an ACE990 interface and when the residual voltage is calculated in Sepam or cannot be calculated and is therefore not available for the protection function L1 current test terminal box single phase or 3 phase generator PCRED301006EN June 2005 Checking of phase current and voltage input connection Procedure m connect according to the diagram below a wire between the generator current terminals to inject current into the primary circuit of the core balance CT or CT with the wire passing through the core balance CT or CT in the P1 P2 direction with P1 the busbar end and P2 the cable end when applicable the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box so as to only supply Sepam s phase 1 voltage input and therefore obtain a residual voltage VO V1 Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box
7. DE50676 x y z Equation S X x Y x Z E exclusive XOR x y 1 s z DE50677 S 1 if one and only one input is set to 1 S 1ifX Y Z 1 Em Complement These functions may use the complement of one or more input values x o DE50678 Equation S X S 1 if X 0 Delay timers Two types of delay timers m on delay timer used to delay the appearance of a signal by a time T T 0 X s DE50679 T S m off delay timer used to delay the disappearance of a signal by a time T 0 T x DE50680 e T za PCRED301006EN June 2005 Definition of symbols Pulse mode operation m on pulse used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal appears x DE50681 m off pulse used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal disappears DE50682 x x oo ilo Note the disappearance of a signal may be caused by an auxiliary power failure Bistable functions Bistable functions may be used to store values S 1 b DE50683 r oo Equation B S RxB 4 3 Control and monitoring functions Logic input output assignment Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions using the SFT2841 software according to the uses listed in the table below m all the logic inputs wheth
8. Welcome window Sepam series 80 CCA783 SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit T aja Modem NE supervisor Modem S LAN Sepam series 20 ACE969 ACE969 ACE969 poma SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network PCRED301006EN June 2005 SFT2841 setting and operating software Welcome window Description The SFT2841 welcome window opens when the program is launched It lets you choose the language for the SFT2841 screens and provides access to the Sepam parameter and protection setting files m in disconnected mode you can open or create a parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 or Sepam series 80 m when connected to a single Sepam unit you can access the parameter and protection setting file for the Sepam unit connected to the PC m when connected to a Sepam network you can access the parameter and protection setting files for a group of Sepam units connected to the PC via a communication network Language of SFT2841 screens SFT2841 software can be used in English French or Spanish The language is selected at the top of the window Using SFT2841 in disconnected mode Disconnected mode allows you to prepare parameter and protection setting files for Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 p
9. Exception frame If an error occurs during request processing a special exception frame is sent Size bytes Field Slave number 171 ABh 14 0Eh 01 or 03 CRC16 a Generic access exception 2Bh 80h Read device identification Type of error 5 43 5 44 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Installation PCRED301006EN June 2005 Contents Precautions Equipment identification Base unit Dimensions Assembly Connection Connection of current input Other phase current input connection schemes Other residual current input connection schemes Other voltage input connection schemes Voltage transformers Current transformers 1 A 5 A LPCT type current sensors CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs CSH30 interposing ring CT ACE990 Core balance CT interface MES114 modules Optional remote modules Connection MET148 2 Temperature sensor module MSA141 Analog output module DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module Communication accessories selection guide Communication interface connection ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network interface ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface ACE937 Fiber optic interface ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol interfaces Description Connection ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters 6 2 6 4 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 18 6 20 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6
10. H Logic inputs Control matrix Predefined control and monitoring functions TC gt Circuit breaker contactor control Annunciation i Ete Predefined Signal lamps messages Protection Personalized functions TS messages Messages PHASE FAULT i Logic equations TC gt Logic inputs and outputs The number of Sepam inputs outputs is adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used The 4 outputs included in the Sepam series 40 base unit may be extended by adding one MES114 module with 10 logic inputs and 4 output relays After selecting the MES114 type required by an application the logic inputs must be assigned to functions The functions to which inputs are assigned are chosen from a list of available functions which covers the whole range of possible uses The functions used can be adapted to meet needs within the limits of the logic inputs available The inputs may also be inverted for undervoltage type operation A default input output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses 4 2 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Control and monitoring functions This page gives the meaning of the symbols used in the block diagrams illustrating the different control and monitoring functions in this chapter Logic functions m OR 21 S DE50675 N lt x Equation S X Y Z m AND
11. MT11188 a E TI E tee ee Fan aar Tr as uri i EI w Mir UNI I CUKA zaj oe CIKLU UL Personalized message editor N O se eo ext YOoff jlon Trip DE51148 2001 10 06 12 40 50 DEFAUT PHASE 1A Trip H 162A Trip 12 161A Trip 13 250A Alarm message on the advanced UMI PCRED301006EN June 2005 Local indication ANSI code 30 Personalized user messages 30 additional messages may be created using the SFT2841 software to link a message to a logic input or the result of a logic equation for example or to replace a predefined message by a personalized message Personalized user message editor in SFT2841 The personalized message editor is integrated in the SOFT2841 software tool and may be accessed in connected or unconnected mode from the control matrix screen m display on the screen the Event tab associated with Protection the predefined messages associated with the protection functions appear m double click on one of the messages displayed to activate the personalized message editor Personalized message editor functions m creation and modification of personalized messages in English and the local language by text input or importing of an existing bitmap file bmp or by point to point drawing m deletion of personalized messages m assignment of predefined or personalized messages to an event defined in the control matrix from the control matrix screen Events
12. The number of operations is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link The initial values may be introduced using the SFT2841 software tool to take into account the real state of a used breaking device Characteristics Cumulative breaking current kA Range 0 to 65535 kA Unit primary kA Resolution 1 kA Accuracy 10 1 digit Number of operations Range 0 to 65535 1 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 8 DE 2 21 Switchgear diagnosis functions 2 22 Operating time Charging time Operating time Operation This function gives the value of the opening operating time of a breaking device and change of status of the device open position contact connected to the 111 input 2 The function is inhibited when the input is set for AC voltage 9 The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES module 3 Optional MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement range 20 to 100 Unit ms Accuracy 1 ms typic
13. a sale te Lach Tae Cit Tame Fabes odsel Bact Damsa F F F iem e Dansal mi E R A mra 8 ki Epy kupki Tis fae Telrad Dipi pese deae eaka F se fim al LES Oo Go mo TE oOo oo oo oe ise 3 nn Lala ali zj MT11191 pizz aee of fr IE are vnd gap E bd pe F a F weluzl mo PF sejal z e fey ory See core eee ea Example of a protection setting screen 7 4 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Use A Sepam document is displayed on the screen via a graphic interface that has the conventional Windows features All the SFT2841 software screens are set up in the same way i e m A title bar with o name of the application SFT2841 o identification of the Sepam document displayed o window manipulation handles u menu bar to access all the SFT2841 software functions unavailable functions are dimmed u toolbar a group of contextual icons for quick access to the main functions also accessed via the menu bar u work zone available to the user presented in the form of tab boxes E status bar with the following information relating to the active document o alarm on o identification of the connection window o SFT2841 operating mode connected or not connected type of Sepam Sepam editing identification identification level Sepam operating mode PC date and time O GOGO Guided navigation A guided navigation mode is proposed to make it easier to enter all of
14. 0 3 27 Protection functions Breaker failure ANSI code 50BF Operation This function is designed to detect the failure of breakers that do not open when a tripping order is sent The breaker failure protection function is activated by an O1 output tripping order received from the overcurrent protection functions 50 51 50N 51N 46 67N 67 It checks for the disappearance of current during the time interval specified by the time delay T It may also take into account the position of the circuit breaker read on the logic inputs to determine the actual opening of the breaker Automatic activation of this protection function requires the use of the program logic circuit breaker control function A specific input may also be used to activate the protection from the equation editor That option is useful for adding special cases of activation e g tripping by an external protection unit The time delayed output of the protection unit should be assigned to a logic output via the control matrix The starting and stopping of the time delay T counter are conditioned by the presence of a current above the set point I gt Is Block diagram activation by 50 51 T 0 g SON SIN 46 67N 67 amp i logic input h Unter i u time delayed circuit breaker closed T F z1 gt output activation from logical equation editor pick up signal Setting O without taking into account circuit break
15. 4 11 Control and monitoring functions Logic discrimination ANSI code 68 Closed ring network Example of closed ring protection function setting Case of a closed ring with two substations each of which comprises two Sepam S42 relays marked R11 R12 and R21 R22 R12 R11 gt gt 67 2 lt 67 2 R21 R22 S gt gt lt a lt a 67 1 gt 67 1 lt __ __ ka 51 lt a 67 1 67 1 la da substation 2 lt a direction of 67 67N protection functions A direction of blocking signals substation 1 Starting at one end of the ring the detection direction of units 1 and 2 of the directional protection functions should be alternated between line and busbar Example of setting of the different Sepam with logic discrimination Substation 1 Sepam S42 no R11 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 O3 send blocking information BI1 O12 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction busbar m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction line Substation 2 Sepam S42 no R22 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 114 blocking reception 2 O3 send blocking information BI1 012 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction busbar m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction line Sepam S42 no R12 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 114
16. 8 Group A Is set point 0 1A 9 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 10 Group A timer hold curve 11 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Group B tripping curve 17 Group B Is set point 0 1A 18 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 19 Group B timer hold curve 20 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 21 Reserved 22 Reserved 23 Reserved 24 Reserved ANSI 50BF Breaker failure Function number 2001 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 Reserved 3 Activity OD 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Use close position of circuit breaker 7 Is set point 0 1A 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication ANSI 50N 51N Earth fault Function number 02xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 4 xx 04 Access to remote settings Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Type of 10 0 calculated 1 measured 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Group A tripping curve 8 Group A IsO set point 0 1A 9 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 10 Group A timer hold curve 11 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 12 Group A H2 restraint O yes 1 no 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved
17. Is Is The operation time tA for the current IA Answer The operation time for the current IA is t 1 80 x 0 8 1 44 s with the Is and T settings is tA K T Table of values of K Vis SIT VIT LTI EIT UIT RI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE El IACI IAC VI IAC El and IEC A and IEC B and IEC C IEC D IEC E IEC F 1 0 3 062 62 005 62 272 200 226 1 1 24 700 90 000 471 4290 2 534 22 461 136 228 330 606 19 033 45 678 122 172 1 2 12 901 45 000 225 000 545 905 2 216 11 777 65 390 157 946 9 413 34 628 82 899 1 5 5 788 18 000 79 200 179 548 1 736 5 336 23 479 55 791 3 891 17 539 36 687 2 0 3 376 9 000 33 000 67 691 1 427 3 152 10 199 23 421 2 524 7 932 16 178 2 5 2 548 6 000 18 857 35 490 1 290 2 402 6 133 13 512 2 056 4 676 9 566 3 0 2 121 4 500 12 375 21 608 1 212 2 016 4 270 8 970 1 792 3 249 6 541 3 5 1 858 3 600 8 800 14 382 1 161 1 777 3 242 6 465 1 617 2 509 4 872 4 0 1 676 3 000 6 600 10 169 1 126 1 613 2 610 4 924 1 491 2 076 3 839 4 5 1 543 2 571 5 143 7 513 1 101 1 492 2 191 3 903 1 396 1 800 3 146 5 0 1 441 2 250 4 125 5 742 1 081 1 399 1 898 3 190 1 321 1 610 2 653 5 5 1 359 2 000 3 385 4 507 1 065 1 325 1 686 2 671 1 261 1 473 2 288 6 0 1 292 1 800 2 829 3 616 1 053 1 264 1 526 2 281 1211 1 370 2 007 6 5 1 236 1 636 2 400 2 954 1 042 1 213 1 402 1 981 1 170 1 289 1 786 7 0 1 188 1 500 2 063 2 450 1 033 1 170 1 305 1 744 1 135 1 224 1 607 7 5 1 146 1 385 1 792 2 060 1 026 1 132 1 228 1 555 1 105 1 171 1 460 8 0 1 110 1
18. Modbus communication Characterization of exchanges The Modbus protocol may be used to read or write one or more bits one or more words the contents of the event counters or the contents of the diagnosis counters Modbus functions supported The Modbus protocol used by Sepam is a compatible sub group of the RTU Modbus protocol The functions listed below are handled by Sepam m basic functions data access o function 1 reading of n output or internal bits o function 2 reading of n input bits o function 3 reading of n output or internal words o function 4 reading of n input words o function 5 writing of 1 bit o function 6 writing of 1 word o function 7 high speed reading of 8 bits o function 15 writing of n bits o function 16 writing of n words m communication management functions O function 8 Modbus diagnosis o function 11 reading of Modbus event counter o function 43 sub function 14 reading of identification The following exception codes are supported m 1 unknown function code m 2 incorrect address m 3 incorrect data m 4 not ready cannot process request m 7 not acknowledged remote reading and setting Response time The communication coupler response time Tr is less than 15 ms including a 3 character silence approximately 3 ms at 9600 bauds This time is given with the following parameters m 9600 bauds m format 8 bits odd parity 1 stop bit guestion b
19. Protection functions Directional phase overcurrent ANSI code 67 Block diagram v busbar line choice DE52319 Cc ao N i 0 90 lt al lt 9 90 0 90 lt a1 lt 8 270 l gt 0 8ls Phase 1 current 11 processing U13 a2 0 90 lt amp 2 lt 8 90 busbar line 12 0 90 lt a2 lt 9 270 choice l gt ls l gt 0 8 Is Phase 2 current I2 processing t u21 i 0 90 lt a3 lt 8 90 busbar line I3 0490 lt a3 lt 6 270 choice I gt Is l gt 0 8 Is Phase 3 current 13 processing phase 1 time delayed g phase 2 time delayed j phase 3 time delayed time delayed output for tripping phase 1 instantaneous _ inverse zone 5 i phase 2 instantaneous 8 inverse zone 21 phase 3 instantaneous inverse zone inverse zone instantaneous amp output direction indication Grouping of output data 3 38 phase 1 inst output T o phase 1 time delayed output gt phase 1 inst output inverse zone phase 2 inst output T 0 phase 2 time delayed output 8 gt phase 2 inst output inverse zone phase 3 inst output m T 0 gt phase 3 time delayed output amp gt phase 3 inst output inverse zone phase 1 time delayed phase 2 time delayed phase 3 time delayed pick up signal phase 1 3 instantaneous 0 8 I
20. m bit 15 event present in event zone 1 m bit 14 Sepam in data loss status in event zone 1 m bit 13 Sepam not synchronous m bit 12 Sepam time not correct m bit 11 presence of events in event zone 2 m bit 10 Sepam in data loss status in event zone 2 m bit9 major fault in Sepam m bit8 partial fault in Sepam m bit 7 setting group A in service m bit6 setting group B in service m bit1 Sepam in local setting mode m other bits reserved undetermined values Status changes of bits 1 6 7 8 10 12 13 and 14 of this word trigger the sending of a time tagged event PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Use of remote indication bits Sepam provides the communication link with 144 TS The remote indications TS are pre assigned to protection and control functions which depend on the Sepam model The TSs may be read using the bit or word functions Each TS transition is time tagged and stored in the event stack see chapter Time tagging of events Address word 0101 TS1 to TS16 Bit address 1010 to 101F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 1 Protection 50 51 unit 1 E E E E E M M 2 Protection 50 51 unit 2 E E E E E M M 3 Protection 50 51 unit 3 E E E E E M M 4 Protection 50 51 unit 4 E E E E E M M 5 Protection 50N 51N unit 1 E E E E E NM M 6 Protection 50N 51N unit 2 E E E E E NM M 7 Protection 50N 51N unit 3 E E E E
21. m tripping of the phase VT and or residual VT protection relay detected by the acquisition on a logic input of the fuse melting contact or auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker protecting the VTs m other types of failures may be processed using the logic equation editor The Phase voltage fault and Residual voltage fault information disappears automatically when the situation returns to normal i e as soon as m the cause of the fault has disappeared m and all of the measured voltages are present Use of circuit breaker closed information The circuit breaker closed information is used to detect the loss of one two or three voltages if it is connected to a logic input If the circuit breaker closed information is not connected to a logic input the detection of VT faults due to the loss of one two or three voltages is not determined by the position of the circuit breaker Block diagram Partial loss of phase voltages DE51254 Vi j vi gt Vsi circuit breaker closed logic input Loss of all phase voltages max voltages L measured lt 10 Unp V Jee 9 max 11 12 13 gt 10 In se circuit breaker closed logic input phase VT fuse melting logic input is gt phase voltage fault and logic equation R VT fault message min voltages measured gt 40 Unp
22. 16 Reserved 17 Group B tripping curve 18 Group B IsO set point 0 1 A 19 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 20 Group B timer hold curve 21 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 22 Group B H2 restraint 0 yes 1 no 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Reserved ANSI 51V Voltage restrained phase overcurrent Function number 2501 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity OD 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Tripping curve 7 Is set point 0 1A 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Timer hold curve 8 10 Timer hold delay 10 ms 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved ANSI 59 Overvoltage Function number 11xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity OD 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Voltage mode 0 phase to neutral 1 phase to phase 7 Us or Vs set point Unp or Vnp 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved PCRED301006EN June 2005 5 35 Modbus communication 5 36 Access to remote settings ANSI 59N Neutral voltage displacement Function number 12xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity O 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Vs0 set point Unp 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved ANSI 66 Start
23. 34 min the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state point 2 In this case it is equal to t T1 0 3216 gt t gt 665 sec i e 11 min which is compatible with the thermal resistance of the motor when cold The negative sequence factor is calculated using the equation defined on page 3 17 The parameters of the second thermal overload relay do not need to be set They are not taken into account by default Example 3 The following data are available m motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 1 m cooling time constant T2 m maximum steady state current Imax lb 1 1 The thermal overload parameters are determined in the same way as in the previous example Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 Imax Ib 120 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 I Ib 0 95 The time constant T1 is calculated so that the thermal overload protection trips after 100 s point 1 With t T1 0 069 l lb 2 and Es2 120 gt T1 100s 0 069 1449 sec 24 min The tripping time starting from the cold state is equal to t T1 0 3567 t 24 min 0 3567 513 s point 2 This tripping time is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 s point 2 If the time constant T1 is lowered the thermal overload protection will trip earlier below point 2 There risk that motor starting when hot will not be possible also exists in this case see Fi
24. 62 5 125 0 275 3 2 9 4 1800 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 2800 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 2600 Maximum length calculated with m minimum optical power available m maximum fiber attenuation m losses in 2 ST connectors 0 6 dBm m optical power margin 3 dBm according to IEC 60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 pm fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1 8 km Description and dimensions RJ45 plug to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Rx female ST type connector Sepam receiving 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending Connection m the sending and receiving fiber optics fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors m fiber optics screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors m the interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m green fittings 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50470 PE50471 Installation ACE969TP communication interface ACE969FO communication interface PCRED301006EN June 2005 ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol interfaces Function The ACE969 multi protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 20 40 and 80 They have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to two independent communication networks m the S LAN supervisory local area network port to connect Sepam to a supervision ne
25. Detection of phase voltage fault phase voltage fault VO calculated by sum VO VT fuse melting DE50448 P residual voltage fault VO VT fault message Detection of residual voltage fault PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 2 23 Switchgear diagnosis functions 2 24 VT supervision ANSI code 60FL Consequences of a VT fault on protection functions A Phase voltage fault affects the following protection functions m 27 27S 32P 320 40 47 51V m 59 only in cases where the protection function is set up for phase to neutral overvoltage when the voltages are measured by two phase VTs VO VT m 67 A residual voltage fault affects the following protection functions m 59N m G7N 67NC The behavior of the protection functions in the event of a Phase voltage fault or Residual voltage fault is to be set up and the following choices are proposed m for protection functions 27 27S 32P 320 40 47 51V 59 and 59N inhibition or no inhibition m for protection function 67 inhibition or non directional operation 50 51 m for protection function 67N 67NC inhibition or non directional operation 50N 51N Setting advice The partial loss of voltages is based on the detection of the presence of negative sequence voltage and the absence of negative sequence current By default m the presence of negative sequence voltage is detected when Vi gt 10 Vnp Vsi m the ab
26. Parameter and protection setting files may only be downloaded in the connected Sepam in Parameter setting mode Once the connection has been established the procedure for downloading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows m activate the Download Sepam function in the Sepam menu m select the file S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 according to the type of application which contains the data to be downloaded Return to factory settings This operation is only possible in Parameter setting mode via the Sepam menu All of the Sepam general characteristics protection settings and the control matrix go back to the default values Uploading of parameter and protection settings The connected Sepam parameter and protection setting file may only be uploaded in Operating mode Once the connection has been established the procedure for uploading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows m activate the Upload Sepam function in the Sepam menu m select the rpg file that is to contain the uploaded data m acknowledge the end of operation report Local operation of Sepam Connected to Sepam SFT2841 offers all the local operating functions available in the advanced UMI screen plus the following functions m setting of Sepam internal clock via the general characteristics tab m implementation of the disturbance recording function via the Fault recording menu OPG validation inhibition of
27. Port S LAN ACE969FO m flashing Tx LED Sepam sending 4 m flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 2 Rx female ST type connector Sepam receiving 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending Rx Tx on Rx Tx a S LAN E LAN V V A B DE51865 sel ral a B oc K Tx Rx 3 12 PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 6 31 Installation CCA612 DE52166 S 2 wire Power supply o RS 485 network B B A A V B B A A V V Ring connection DE52165 6 32 ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol interfaces Connection Power supply and Sepam m the ACE969 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m green RJ45 fittings m the ACE969 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 230 V AC Terminals e1 e2 supply Wiring m wiring without fittings o 1 wire with max cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm z AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with max cross section 0 2 to 1 mm 2 AWG 24 16 O stripped length 8 to 10 mm m wiring with fittings O recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm wires o tube length 8 2 mm O stripped length 8 mm 1 green yellow wire max length 3 m and max cross section 2 5 mm Functional earth 4 mm ring lugs Earthing
28. Protection time delayed output and additional outputs when applicable Additional actions in the Characteristic tab In service out of service Protection latching Participation of the protection unit in circuit breaker tripping Tripping Tripping by the circuit breaker control function Forced on O1 Inhibit closing Inhibition of closing by the circuit breaker Forced on O2 control function Closing Closing by the circuit breaker control function Forced on O11 requires an MES114 Pick up Logical OR of the instantaneous output of all protection units Drop out A protection unit time delay counter has not yet gone back to 0 TCS fault Trip circuit fault Remote control discrepancy Circuit breaker position Discrepancy between the last state ordered by the remote monitoring and control system and the position of the circuit breaker CB control fault A circuit breaker open or close order has not been executed Fault recording inhibition Disturbance recording inhibited Sending of blocking information BI1 Sending of the blocking information to the following Sepam in logic discrimination chain 1 O3 by default Sending of blocking information BI2 Sending of the blocking information to the next Sepam in logic discrimination chain 2 O12 by default On S42 only Tripping by logic discrimination Tripping order sent by the logic discrimination function Only when the logic discrimination
29. This function detects a discrepancy between the last remote control order received fi d and the actual position of the circuit breaker z1 T 1s gt si The information is accessible via remote indication TS105 Too discrepancy received 8 112 q Trip circuit supervision and open closed matching Description This supervision is designed for trip circuits m with shunt trip units The function detects o circuit continuity o loss of supply o mismatching of position contacts The function inhibits closing of the breaking device m with undervoltage trip units The function detects o mismatching of position contacts coil supervision being unnecessary in this case The information is accessible in the matrix and via the remote indication TS106 MT10190 Block diagram li MT10191 8 8112 T 0 21 1 1 P gt trip circuit fault T 2s reset 0 1 With MES option The function is activated if inputs 111 and 112 are set respectively as circuit breaker open Wiring for undervoltage trip unit position and circuit breaker closed position Open and close order supervision Following a circuit breaker open or close order the system checks whether after a 2 seconds time delay the circuit breaker has actually changed status If the circuit breaker status does not match the last order sent a Control fault message and remote indication TS108 are generated 4 8 8 Merlin Gerin
30. Use Use of passwords Sepam has two 4 digit passwords m the first password symbolized by a key is used to modify the protection settings m the second password symbolized by two keys is used to modify the protection settings and all the general settings The 2 factory set passwords are 0000 Entry of passwords Press the key to display the following screen passwords Qm gt OXXX Scroll the digits using the cursor keys 4 then confirm to go on to the next digit by pressing the amp key Do not use characters other than numbers 0 to 9 for each of the Press the eS key to position the cursor on the first digit 4 digits When the password for your qualification level is entered press the w key to position the cursor on the apply box Press the key again to confirm When Sepam is in protection setting mode a key appears at the top of the display When Sepam is in parameter setting mode two keys appear at the top of the display 50 51 pE glor O On Trip curve definitive thershold 120A delay 100ms response time curve definitive delay 0ms Access to the protection setting or parameter setting modes is disabled m by pressing the key m automatically if no keys are activated for more than 5 minutes 7 18 Advanced UMI Data entry principles Modification
31. V s N 4 IM v N N v 1 90 V RI y s A bA inverse time SIT v v 1 00 s N very inverse time VIT or LTI N v AN extremely inverse EIT ultra inverse UIT Vis Vs 0 10 gt oy 1 10 w 1 10 100 IEEE curves IAC curves t s t s A 10000 00 MN A 3 E 1000 00 i 100 00 i j i 1 A 1 100 00 4 s x 10 00 10 00 1 00 1 00 Vis 0 10 gt l is 0 10 gt 1 10 100 1 10 100 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Curve equations IEC curve inverse type idi S IEC curve RI type l T tab poto 3 1706 0 339 0 236 lg IEEE curve with A T tab ne 4B x E 1 lg IAC curve with B D E T t D A XK UES Ee Eo Is Is Is Example 8 ts IEC curve VIT type E T 1 5 sec 10 Ils example gt Ws PCRED301006EN June 2005 General IDMT protection functions Characteristic curves k a B IEC standard inverse A 0 14 0 02 2 97 IEC very inverse B 13 5 1 1 50 IEC long time inverse B 120 1 13 33 IEC extremely inverse C 80 2 0 808 IEC ultra inverse 315 2 2 5 1 Characteristic curves A B p B IEEE moderately inverse 0 010 0 023 0 02 0 241 IEEE very inverse 3 922 0 098 2 0 138 IEEE extremely inverse 5 64 0 0243 2 0 081 Characteristic curves A B Cc D E B IAC inverse 0 208 0 863 0 800 0 418 0 195 0 297 IAC very inverse 0 090 0 795 0 100 1 288 7 958 0 165 IAC extremely inverse 0 004 0 638 0 620 1 787 0 246 0 092 TM
32. o tube length 8 2 mm o stripped length 8 mm 8 DE 6 19 DE51338 Installation 6 20 Optional remote modules Connection The optional MET148 2 MSA141 or DSM303 modules are connected to the base unit connector D by a series of links using prefabricated cords which come in 3 different lengths with black fittings m CCA770 L 0 6 m m CCA772 L 2 m m CCA774 L 4 Mm The DSM303 module may only be connected at the end of the series Maximum configuration A maximum of three modules may be connected to the base unit in compliance with the module order and maximum connection lengths indicated in the table CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148 2 CCA774 DSM303 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148 2 CCA772 MET148 2 CCA772 MET148 2 CCA770 MET148 2 CCA774 DSM303 gt VvVVYVYVVYYVY CCA612 CCA770 MSA141 module e MET148 2 CCA772 po ACE949 2 2 wires Podule or or ACE959 4 wires CCA774 or ACE937 fiber optic module DSM303 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50021 DE51648 DE51649 z A aA Installation MET148 2 temperature sensor module 1 70 mm with CCA77x cord connected MET148 2 PCRED301006EN June 2005 N 5 N 7 N 8 MET148 2 Temperature sensor mo
33. tripping time delay 10 ms 24 Group B timer hold curve 25 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 26 Reserved 27 Reserved 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 5 37 Modbus communication ANSI 67N 67NC Directional earth fault Function number 22xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Access to remote settings Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Type 0 projection 1 directionalized 5 Type of 10 Sum or Core balance CT 0 calculated 1 measured 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Group A direction O line 1 busbar 9 Group A types 1 and 2 characteristic angle 0 45 angle 1 lt 0 angle 2 15 angle 3 30 angle 4 45 angle 5 60 angle 6 90 angle Group A type 3 limit 1 0 to 359 10 Group A type 1 sector 2 76 sector 3 83 sector 4 86 sector Group A type 3 limit 2 0 to 359 11 Group A tripping curve 12 Group A types 1 and 2 IsO set point 0 1A Group A type 3 IsO set point 0 01A 13 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 14 Group A types 1 and 2 VsO Unp Group A type 3 Vso 0 1 Unp 15 Group A timer hold curve 16 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 17 Group A memory time 10 ms 18 Group A memory voltage Unp 19 Reserved 20 Reserved 21 Reserved 22 Reserved 23 Group B d
34. x 1 0120 R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V1 x 1 0121 R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V2 x 1 0122 R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V3 x 1 0123 R 3 4 16NS 1V Residual voltage VO x 1 0124 R 3 4 16NS 1V Positive sequence voltage Vd x 1 0125 R 3 4 16NS 1V Negative sequence voltage Vi x 1 0126 R 3 4 16NS 1V Frequency 0127 R 3 4 16NS 0 01 Hz Active power P x 1 0128 R 3 4 16S 1 kW Reactive power Q x 1 0129 R 3 4 16S 1 kvar Apparent power S x 1 012A R 3 4 16S 1 kVA Peak demand active power Pm x 1 012B R 3 4 16S 1 kW Peak demand reactive power Om x 1 012C R 3 4 16S 1 kvar Power factor cos x 100 012D R 3 4 16S 0 01 Positive active energy Ea x 1 012E 012F R 3 4 2 x 16NS 100 kW h Negative active energy Ea x 1 0130 0131 R 3 4 2 x 16NS 100 kW h Positive reactive energy Er x 1 0132 0133 R 3 4 2 x 16NS 100 kvar h Negative reactive energy Er x 1 0134 0135 R 3 4 2 x 16NS 100 kvar h PCRED301006EN June 2005 5 11 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Measurement zone x 10 Measurements x 10 Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Phase current 11 x 10 0136 R 3 4 16NS 1A Phase current 12 x 10 0137 R 3 4 16NS 1A Phase current 13 x 10 0138 R 3 4 16NS 1A Residual current I0 Sum x 10 0139 R 3 4 16NS 1A Residual current measured x 10 013A R 3 4 16NS 1A Average
35. 0 0449 0 0410 90 0 3051 0 2868 0 2701 0 2549 0 2057 0 1699 0 1429 0 1219 0 1054 0 092 0 0811 0 0720 0 0644 0 0579 0 0524 0 0476 0 0435 95 0 3251 0 3054 0 2875 0 2712 0 2185 0 1802 0 1514 0 1292 0 1116 0 0974 0 0858 0 0761 0 0681 0 0612 0 0554 0 0503 0 0459 100 0 3456 0 3244 0 3051 0 2877 0 2314 0 1907 0 1601 0 1365 0 1178 0 1028 0 0905 0 0803 0 0718 0 0645 0 0584 0 0530 0 0484 105 0 3664 0 3437 0 3231 0 3045 0 2445 0 2012 0 1688 0 1438 0 1241 0 1082 0 0952 0 0845 0 0755 0 0679 0 0614 0 0558 0 0509 110 0 3877 0 3634 0 3415 0 3216 0 2578 0 2119 0 1776 0 1512 0 1304 0 1136 0 1000 0 0887 0 0792 0 0712 0 0644 0 0585 0 0534 115 0 4095 0 3835 0 3602 0 3390 0 2713 0 2227 0 1865 0 1586 0 1367 0 1191 0 1048 0 0929 0 0830 0 0746 0 0674 0 0612 0 0559 120 0 4317 0 4041 0 3792 0 3567 0 2849 0 2336 0 1954 0 1661 0 1431 0 1246 0 1096 0 0972 0 0868 0 0780 0 0705 0 0640 0 0584 125 0 4545 0 4250 0 3986 0 3747 0 2988 0 2446 0 2045 0 1737 0 1495 0 1302 0 1144 0 1014 0 0905 0 0813 0 0735 0 0667 0 0609 130 0 4778 0 4465 0 4184 0 3930 0 3128 0 2558 0 2136 0 1813 0 156 0 1358 0 1193 0 1057 0 0943 0 0847 0 0766 0 0695 0 0634 135 0 5016 0 4683 0 4386 0 4117 0 3270 0 2671 0 2228 0 1890 0 1625 0 1414 0 1242 0 1100 0 0982 0 0881 0 0796 0 0723 0 0659 140 0 5260 0 4907 0 4591 0 4308 0 3414 0 2785 0 2321 0 1967 0 1691 0 147 0 1291 0 1143 0 1020 0 0916 0 0827 0 0751 0 0685 145 0 5511 0 5136 0 4802 0 4502 0 3561 0 2900 0 2414 0 2045 0 1757 0 1527 0 1340 0 1187 0 1058 0 0950 0 0858 0 0778 0 07
36. 1 0 015 InO IsO x 100 Setting 2 Unp to 80 Unp Resolution 1 Accuracy at 90 180 60 5 Drop out pick up ratio gt 89 Sector Setting 86 83 76 Accuracy 42 Time delay T Setting inst 0 05 s lt T lt 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy lt 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms Memory time TOmem Setting 0 05 s lt TOmem lt 300 s Resolution 10 ms ou 1 digit Memory voltage VOmem Setting 0 2 Unp lt VOmem lt 80 Unp Resolution 1 Characteristic times Operation time Pick up lt 45 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 IsO for IsO z 0 3 Ino typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 IsO for IsO lt 0 3 Ino typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 35 ms at TOmem 0 1 InO sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT InO In of the CT if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer CSH30 InO In of the CT 10 if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer CSH30 with the sensitivity x 10 option 3 43 DE50457 Protection functions Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Type 2 operation The protection function operates like an earth fault protection function with an added direction criterion It is suitable for closed ring distribution networks with directly earthed neutral It has all the characteristics of an earth fault p
37. 1 94 1 86 1 80 1 74 1 68 1 627 1 577 1 53 1 485 1 444 1 404 1 367 1 332 li Ib contd 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 2500 K cont d 1 298 1 267 1 236 1 18 1 167 1 154 1 13 1 105 1 082 1 06 1 04 1 02 1 3 14 lf Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Negative sequence overvoltage ANSI code 47 Operation The protection function picks up if the negative sequence component of the voltages Vi is above the set point Vsi m it includes a definite time delay T m the negative sequence voltage Vi is determined from the three phase voltages MT10546 gt 12 22 gt Vi a a V2 aV3 or o 12 gt Vi z U21 aU32 2r with a e 3 This protection funciton only operates with connections V1V2V3 U21 U32 VO and U21 U32 Block diagram U21 l T 0 Sijs Vi gt Vsi m time delayed output pick up signal Characteristics Vsi set point Setting 1 Unp to 50 Unp Accuracy 2 for Viz 10 Unp 5 for Vi lt 10 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 2 5 at Vi z 10 Unp Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 55 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 3 15 MT10867 MT 10869 MT10868 DE50561 Protection fun
38. 286 1 571 1 751 1 019 1 099 1 164 1 400 1 078 1 126 1 337 8 5 1 078 1 200 1 390 1 504 1 013 1 070 1 112 1 273 1 055 1 087 1 233 9 0 1 049 1 125 1 238 1 303 1 008 1 044 1 068 1 166 1 035 1 054 1 144 9 5 1 023 1 059 1 109 1 137 1 004 1 021 1 031 1 077 1 016 1 026 1 067 10 0 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 10 5 0 979 0 947 0 906 0 885 0 996 0 981 0 973 0 934 0 985 0 977 0 941 11 0 0 959 0 900 0 825 0 787 0 993 0 963 0 950 0 877 0 972 0 957 0 888 11 5 0 941 0 857 0 754 0 704 0 990 0 947 0 929 0 828 0 960 0 939 0 841 12 0 0 925 0 818 0 692 0 633 0 988 0 932 0 912 0 784 0 949 0 922 0 799 12 5 0 910 0 783 0 638 0 572 0 985 0 918 0 896 0 746 0 938 0 907 0 761 13 0 0 895 0 750 0 589 0 518 0 983 0 905 0 882 0 712 0 929 0 893 0 727 13 5 0 882 0 720 0 546 0 471 0 981 0 893 0 870 0 682 0 920 0 880 0 695 14 0 0 870 0 692 0 508 0 430 0 979 0 882 0 858 0 655 0 912 0 868 0 667 14 5 0 858 0 667 0 473 0 394 0 977 0 871 0 849 0 631 0 905 0 857 0 641 15 0 0 847 0 643 0 442 0 362 0 976 0 861 0 840 0 609 0 898 0 846 0 616 15 5 0 836 0 621 0 414 0 334 0 974 0 852 0 831 0 589 0 891 0 837 0 594 16 0 0 827 0 600 0 388 0 308 0 973 0 843 0 824 0 571 0 885 0 828 0 573 16 5 0 817 0 581 0 365 0 285 0 971 0 834 0 817 0 555 0 879 0 819 0 554 17 0 0 808 0 563 0 344 0 265 0 970 0 826 0 811 0 540 0 874 0 811 0 536 17 5 0 800 0 545 0 324 0 246 0 969 0 819 0 806 0 527 0 869 0 804 0 519 18 0 0 792 0 529 0 307 0 229 0 968 0 812 0 801 0 514 0 864 0 797 0 504 18
39. 3 Activity 4 Negative sequence factor K 0 without 1 low 2 25 2 average 4 5 3 high 9 5 Current threshold Is switching from rate 1 rate 2 Ib 6 Accounting for ambient temperature 0 no 1 yes 7 Maximum eguipment temperature c 8 Additional settings taken into account rate 2 0 no 1 yes 9 Learnt cooling time constant T2 learnt taken into 0 no account 1 yes 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Rate 1 heatrise alarm set point 13 Rate 1 heatrise tripping set point 14 Rate 1 heating time constant mn 15 Rate 1 cooling time constant mn 16 Rate 1 initial heatrise 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved 20 Reserved 21 Reserved 22 Rate 2 heatrise alarm set point 23 Rate 2 heatrise tripping set point 24 Rate 2 heating time constant mn 25 Rate 2 cooling time constant mn 26 Rate 2 initial heatrise 27 Rate 2 base current for rate 2 0 1A 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 30 Reserved 31 Reserved PCRED301006EN June 2005 5 33 Modbus communication 5 34 Access to remote settings ANSI 50 51 Phase overcurrent Function number 01xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Confirmation 0 none 1 neg seq overvoltage 2 undervoltage 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Group A tripping curve
40. 3 Ino Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1A Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 InO rated current set in the general settings 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 excluding sensor accuracy 3 In0 InCT or InO InCT 10 according to setting 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Metering functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Average current and peak demand currents Operation This function gives m the average RMS current for each phase that has been obtained for each integration interval m the greatest average RMS current value for each phase that has been obtained since the last reset The values are refreshed after each integration interval an interval that may be set from 5 to 60 mn and are saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Resetting to zero m press the 2 key on the advanced UMI display unit when a peak demand current is displayed m via the clear command in the SFT2841 software m via the communication link remote control order TC6 Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 1 5 In Unit AorkA Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 In 5 if lt 0 3 In Display format 9 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 A Display format 5 10 15 30 60
41. 3 phase generator g g A V m turn the generator on m apply the 3 generator voltages V1 N V2 N and V3 N balanced and set to the rated secondary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vns Uns v3 m inject the 3 generator currents 11 12 and 13 balanced and set to the rated secondary current of the CTs i e 1 A or 5 A and in phase with the voltages applied i e generator phase displacement a1 V1 N 11 a2 V2 N 12 a3 V3 N 13 0 m use the SFT2841 software to check the following the value indicated for each of the phase currents 11 12 and 13 is approximately egual to the rated primary current of the CTs the value indicated for each of the phase to neutral voltages V1 V2 and V3 is approximately egual to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VT Vnp Unp V3 the value indicated for each phase displacement 91 V1 11 2 V2 12 and e3 V3 13 between currents 11 12 or 13 and voltages V1 V2 or V3 respectively is approximately equal to 0 m turn the generator off PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 7 25 199 MT1 Commissioning L1 current test terminal box Checking of phase current and voltage input connection With single phase generator and voltages delivered by 3 VTs Procedure m connect the single phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test terminal boxes using the plugs provided according to the block diagr
42. 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4 60 Es 105 0 0209 0 0193 0 0180 0 0168 0 0131 0 0106 0 0087 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0047 0 0042 0 0037 0 0033 0 0030 0 0027 0 0025 110 0 0422 0 0391 0 0363 0 0339 0 0264 0 0212 0 0175 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0095 0 0084 0 0075 0 0067 0 0060 0 0055 0 0050 115 0 0639 0 0592 0 0550 0 0513 0 0398 0 0320 0 0264 0 0222 0 0189 0 0164 0 0143 0 0126 0 0112 0 0101 0 0091 0 0082 0 0075 120 0 0862 0 0797 0 0740 0 0690 0 0535 0 0429 0 0353 0 0297 0 0253 0 0219 0 0191 0 0169 0 0150 0 0134 0 0121 0 0110 0 0100 125 0 1089 0 1007 0 0934 0 0870 0 0673 0 0540 0 0444 0 0372 0 0317 0 0274 0 0240 0 0211 0 0188 0 0168 0 0151 0 0137 0 0125 130 0 1322 0 1221 0 1132 0 1054 0 0813 0 0651 0 0535 0 0449 0 0382 0 0330 0 0288 0 0254 0 0226 0 0202 0 0182 0 0165 0 0150 135 0 1560 0 1440 0 1334 0 1241 0 0956 0 0764 0 0627 0 0525 0 0447 0 0386 0 0337 0 0297 0 0264 0 0236 0 0213 0 0192 0 0175 140 0 1805 0 1664 0 1540 0 1431 0 1100 0 0878 0 0720 0 0603 0 0513 0 0443 0 0386 0 0340 0 0302 0 0270 0 0243 0 0220 0 0200 145 0 2055 0 1892 0 1750 0 1625 0 1246 0 0993 0 0813 0 0681 0 0579 0 0499 0 0435 0 0384 0 0341 0 0305 0 0274 0 0248 0 0226 150 0 2312 0 2127 0 1965 0 1823 0 1395 0 1110 0 0908 0 0759 0 0645 0 0556 0 0485 0 0427 0 0379 0 0339 0 0305 0 0276 0 0251 155 0 2575 0 2366 0 2185 0 2025 0 1546 0 1228 0 1004 0 0838 0 0712 0 0614 0 0535 0 0471 0 0418 0 0374 0 0336 0 0304 0 0277 160 0 2846 0 2612 0 2409 0 2231 0 1699 0 1347 0 1100 0 0918 0 0780
43. 42 to 51 a IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 en 2 51020 S IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 Characteristic times IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 Operation time Pick up lt 35 ms at 2 IsO typically 25 ms IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 Confirmed instantaneous IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 m inst lt 50 ms at 2 IsO for Is0 z 0 3 Ind 4 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 5 For IsO lt 0 4 In0 the minimum time delay is 300 ms typically 35 ms um inst lt 70 ms at 2 IsO for IsO lt 0 3 Ino typically 50 ms If a shorter time delay is needed use the CT CSH30 NI lt 35 ms combination 2 Overshoot time Reset time lt 40 ms for T1 0 PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 DE 3 31 Protection functions Operation The voltage restrained phase overcurrent protection function is used to protect generators The operation set point is adjusted according to the voltage to take into account cases of faults close to the generator which cause voltage dips and short circuit current This protection function is three pole It picks up if one two or three phase currents reach the voltage adjusted operation set point Is The alarm linked to operation indicates the faulty phase or phases It is time delayed and the time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves opposite The set point is adjusted according to the lowest of the phase to phase voltage
44. 8 SEKTE 6 21 Mt11009 DE51650 DE52182 Installation MSA141 analog output module 1 70 mm with CCA77x cord connected MSA141 Re WIN 6 22 MSA141 Analog output module Function The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog signal m selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting m 0 10 mA 4 20 mA 0 20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting m scaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the converted measurement Example the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0 10 mA analog output with a dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is O minimum value 0 o maximum value 3000 m a single module for each Sepam base unit to be connected by one of the CCA770 CCA772 or CCA774 cords 0 6 2 or 4 meters The analog output may also be remotely managed via the communication network Characteristics Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0 2 kg On symmetrical DIN rail 25 C to 70 C Same characteristics as Sepam base units Current Scaling no data input checking 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA Minimum value Maximum value lt 600 Q wiring included 0 5 Load impedance Accuracy Phase and residual currents Phase to neutral and phase to phase voltages Freguenc
45. A DE51846 196 22 176 Top view of Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114 flush mounted in front panel 40 1 With basic UMI 23 mm 40 98 3154 Side view of Sepam with advanced UMI and MES1 14 flush mounted in front panel Clearance for Sepam assembly l and wiring 1 With basic UMI 23 mm Cut out Cutout accuracy must be complied with to ensure good withstand For mounting plate between For mounting plate 3 17 mm 1 5 mm and 3 mm thick 0 125 inch thick DE50924 DE52187 Assembly with AMT840 mounting plate Used to mount Sepam at the back of the compartment with access to the connectors on the rear panel Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI DSM303 DE51846 Sepam with basic UMI and MES114 mounted with AMT840 Mounting plate 2 mm thick 8 Merlin Gerin _ PCRED301006EN June 2005 Installation Base unit Assembly The Sepam is simply flush mounted and clamped without requiring any additional screw type fastening gt Mounting 4 Present the product as clamp indicated making sure the metal plate is correctly entered in the groove at the bottom Tilt the product and press on the top part to clamp it with the clips DE51143 1 Ne Slot PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 6 5 DE51131 Installation Base unit Connection
46. Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio 295 Vs0 set point Setting Calculated VO 2 Unp lt Vso lt 80 Unp sum of 3 voltages Measured VO 0 6 Unp lt Vso lt 80 Unp external VT Resolution 0 1 for VsO lt 10 1 for Vso z 10 Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio 295 Time delay T Setting Instantaneous 50 ms lt T lt 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy lt 3 or 20 ms at 2 IsO Characteristics times Operation time Pick up lt 40 ms at 2 IsO Instantaneous lt 50 ms at 2 IsO Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 50 ms 1 The tripping zone Lim 2 Lim 1 must be greater than or equal to 10 2 For IsO 0 the protection is equivalent to the neutral voltage displacement protection ANSI 59N 3 Inob k n with n number of core balance CT turns and k factor to be determined according to the wiring of the ACE990 0 00578 lt k lt 0 04 Standard settings for tripping zone The settings below are given for usual applications in the different earthing systems The shaded boxes represent default settings Angle Lim 1 190 100 100 Angle Lim 2 350 280 280 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Definition Reclaim time The reclaim time delay is activated by a circuit breaker closing order given by the recloser If no faults are detected before the end of the reclaim time delay the initial fault is considered to have been cleared Otherwise
47. COOF Read write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 None lnitialized to 0 OCOF COFO COFF Read write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 None lnitialized to 0 Protection setting zone The protection setting zone is an exchange table which is used to read and set the protection functions 2 setting zones are available to be used by 2 masters Protection setting Word address zone 1 Word address zone 2 Access Modbus function enabled Setting read buffer 1E00 1E7C 2000 207C R 3 Setting read request 1E80 2080 R W 3 6 16 Remote setting request buffer 1F00 1F7C 2100 217C R W 3 16 See Protection settings chapter Fault recorder zone The fault recorder zone is an exchange table which is used to read disturbance recording records 2 zones are available to be used by 2 masters Disturbance recording Word address zone 1 Word address zone 2 Access Modbus function enabled Choice of transfer function 2200 2203 2400 2403 R W 3 16 Identification zone 2204 2228 2404 2428 R 3 Disturb rec exchange zone 2300 2500 R W 3 6 16 Disturbance recording data 2301 237C 2501 257C R 3 See Disturbance recording chapter PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 EDITH 5 15 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Data encoding For all formats If a measurement overruns the maximum permissible value for the related format the value read for the measurement will be the maximum permissible value for the format 16NS format The information is encoded in a
48. Counter definition Sepam manages the Modbus diagnosis counters These are m CPT1 Number of valid frames received whether the slave is involved or not m CPT2 Number of frames received with a CRC error or physical error frames with more than 255 bytes frames received with at least one parity overrun framing or line break error m CPT3 Number of exception responses generated even if not transmitted due to receipt of a broadcast request m CPT4 Number of frames specifically addressed to the station excluding broadcasting m CPT5 Number of valid broadcast frames received m CPT6 Not significant m CPT7 Not significant m CPT8 Number of frames received with at least one character having a physical error parity overrun framing or line break m CPT9 Number of valid requests received and correctly executed Counter reset The counters are reset to 0 m when they reach the maximum value FFFFh 65535 m when they are reset by a Modbus command function 8 m when Sepam auxiliary power is lost m when communication parameters are modified Using the counters Modbus diagnosis counters help to detect and resolve communication problems They can be accessed by the dedicated read functions Modbus protocol functions 8 and 11 CPT2 and CPT9 counters can be displayed on SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis screen An incorrect speed or parity increments CPT2 Non reception is signaled by the lack of change on CPT9 Operating anom
49. DEFAUT VO Overfrequency OVER FREQ FREQUENCE gt gt Underfrequency UNDER FREQ FREQUENCE lt lt Negative sequence overvoltage UNBALANCE V DESEQUILIBRE V Temperature RTDs OVER TEMP ALM OVER TEMP TRIP RTD S FAULT 1 to 2 T ALARME T DECI DEFAUT SONDES 1 a 2 Thermostat THERMOS ALARM THERMOT ALARME THERMOS TRIP THERMOS DECL Buchholz BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHH ALARME BUCHH GAS TRIP BUCHH GAZ DECL Pressure PRESSURE ALM PRESSION ALARME PRESSURE TRIP PRESSION DECL Thermistor PTC NTC THERM ST ALARME THERMIST DECL THERMIST ALARM THERMIST TRIP External tripping x 1 to 3 EXT TRIP x 1 to 3 DECL EXT x 1 3 Trip circuit supervision TRIP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DECL Circuit breaker control CONTROL FAULT DEFAUT COMPE Recloser CYCLE x 1 to 4 4 CYCLE x 1 a4 Recloser FINAL TRIP DECL DEFINITIF Recloser CLEARED FAULT DEFAUT ELIMINE SF6 SF6 LOW BAISSE SF6 Phase VT supervision VT FAULT DEFAUT TP VO VT supervision VT FAULT VO DEFAUT TP VO CT supervision CT FAULT DEFAUT TC 1 RTD FAULT message refer to the maintenance chapter 2 With indication of the faulty phase 3 With indication of the faulty phase when used with phase to neutral voltage 4 With indication of the protection unit that has initiated the cycle phase fault earth fault 4 16 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Control and monitoring functions
50. DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 sto 20s ANSI 50V 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC VI El DT or IDMT Is set point 0 5 to 24 In Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 5 to 2 4 In IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 59 Overvoltage IDMT IDMT reset time Phase to phase 50 to 150 of Unp ANSI 59N Neutral voltage displacement ANSI 66 Starts per hour Starts per period 2 to 80 of Unp 1 to 60 Phase to neutral 50 to 150 of Vnp Period 0 5sto20s 0 05 s to 300 s 0 05 s to 300 s 1to 6hr Consecutive starts 1 to 60 ANSI 67 Directional phase overcurrent Time between starts 0 to 90 mn Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is set point 0 1 to 24 In Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 2 4 In IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 20 s Characteristic angle 30 45 60 1 Tripping as of 1
51. E im 121 Buchholz alarm E 122 Thermostat alarm im 123 Pressure alarm E im 124 SF6 alarm E E m 125 Recloser ready 126 Inductive 127 Capacitive 128 Phase inverse rotation Address word 0109 TS129 to TS144 Bit address 1090 to 109F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 129 Send blocking input 2 130 Reserved 131 Reserved 132 Reserved 133 Reserved 134 Reserved 135 Reserved 136 Reserved 137 Reserved 138 Reserved 139 Reserved 140 Reserved 141 Reserved 142 Reserved 143 Reserved 144 Reserved PCRED301006EN June 2005 HA Merlin Gerin 5 19 Modbus communication Use of remote control orders Remote control orders are pre assigned to protection Data addresses and encoding Address word 00F0 TC1 to TC16 Bit address OF0O to OFOF S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 TC Application control and metering functions 1 Tripping E E E E NM NM M Remote control orders may be carried out in two 2 Closing E E E NM NM E M modes 3 Swtiching to setting group A E E E NM NM NM Mm m direct mode 4 Switching to setting group B E um 8 8 m m m confirmed SBO select before operate mode 5 Sepam reset um a ee It is possible to inhibit all the remote control orders via s Peak deriand current zero reset a a ae one logic input assigned to the function inhibit remote 7 Inhibit thermal protection ua
52. Function number 2301 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity R oO N Type 0 reverse power 1 overpower Reserved Reserved Ps set point 100 W O N olan Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 5 31 Modbus communication 5 32 Access to remote settings ANSI 32Q Reactive overpower Function number 2401 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity R oj Nj Type 0 reverse power 1 overpower Reserved Reserved Qs set point 100 var JNJ aJ Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved ANSI 37 Phase undercurrent Function number 0501 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity Reserved Reserved Is set point Tripping time delay Reserved Reserved Reserved A J OJ OJ JJOJU A j N ajo Reserved ANSI 38 49T Temperature monitoring Function number 15xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 16 xx 10h Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity OD Reserved Reserved Alarm set point C Trip set point C Reserved Reserved Reser
53. June 2005 Checking of parameter and protection settings Determination of parameter and protection settings All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings are determined ahead of time by the design department in charge of the application and should be approved by the customer It is presumed that the study has been carried out with all the attention necessary or even consolidated by a network coordination study All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings should be available at the time of commissioning m in paper file format with the SFT2841 software the parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam may be printed directly or exported in a text file for editing m and when applicable in the format of a file to be downloaded into Sepam using the SFT2841 software Checking of parameters and protection settings Check to be made when the Sepam parameter and protection settings have not been entered or downloaded during commissioning testing to confirm the conformity of the parameter and protection settings entered with the values determined during the study The aim of this check is not to confirm the relevance of the parameter and protection settings m go through all the parameter and protection setting screens in the SFT2841 software in the order proposed in guided mode m for each screen compare the values entered in the Sepam with the values recorded in the parameter and protection setting file m correct any p
54. MET148 2 n 2 module version 02E8 02EA R 3 ASCII 6c MSA141 module version 02EB 02ED R 3 ASCII 6c DSM303 module version 02EE 02F0 R 3 ASCII 6c Name of language 02F1 02FA R 3 ASCII 20c Customized languaged version number 2 02FB R 3 English language version number 02FC R 3 Boot version number 2 02FD R 3 Extension word O2FE R 3 1 40 not configured 42 S41 44 T40 46 M41 41 S40 43 S42 45 T42 47 G40 2 MSB major index LSB minor index 3 2E2 word MSB 10 h Sepam LSB hardware configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Option MD MX Extension MET148 2 2 DSM303 MSA141 MET148 2 1MES114 MES108 Mod MX 0 z x x x x y y Mod MD 1 z x 0 x x y y Accuracy Measurement accuracy depends on the weight of the unit it is equal to the value of the point divided by 2 5 14 x 1 if option included y 1 if option included exclusive options z 1 if extension in 2FE word 4 Bit 0 1 if MES114E or MES114F Vac set up Examples l Unit 1A Accuracy 1 2 0 5 A u21 Unit 10 V Accuracy 10 2 5 V 8 LE PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Test zone The test zone is a 16 word zone that may be accessed via the communication link by all functions in both read and write modes to facilitate communication testing at the time of commissioning or to test the link Test zone Word address Bit address Access Modbus function Format enabled Test 0C00 C000
55. Main functions Protection m phase overcurrent protection and earth fault protection with adjustable reset time and switching of the active group of settings and logic discrimination m earth fault protection insensitive to transformer switching m RMS thermal overload protection that takes into account external operating temperature and ventilation operating rates m directional earth fault protection suitable for all earthing systems isolated compensated or impedant neutral m directional phase overcurrent protection with voltage memory m voltage and frequency protection functions under over Communication Sepam can be connected to a supervision communication network S LAN based on the following communication protocols m Modbus RTU m DNP3 m IEC 60870 5 103 All the data needed for centralized equipment management from a remote monitoring and control system are available via the communication port m reading all measurements alarms protection settings m writing breaking device remote control orders Note 2 manuals describe the use of DNP3 and IEC 60870 5 103 protocols for all Sepam units m DNP3 communication user manual reference SEPED305001EN m EC 60870 5 103 communication user manual reference SEPED305002EN Diagnosis 3 types of diagnosis data for improved operation m network and machine diagnosis tripping current context of the last 5 trips unbalance ratio disturbance recording m switchgear dia
56. PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT10196 T MT10197 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination functions ANSI code 68 Radial network Application With this type of system time delays are set in accordance with the device to be This function provides protected without any concern for the discrimination aspect m full tripping discrimination m a substantial reduction in delayed tripping of the mni circuit breakers located nearest the source drawback Operating principle of the classical time based discrimination process sending of BI The system applies to the definite time DT and IDMT standard inverse time SIT very inverse time VIT extremely inverse time EIT and ultra inverse time UIT phase overcurrent earth fault and directional protection functions MT10195 level n 1 Sepam O3 output other level td X 0 9s n Sepam level n l l l td X 0 6s o receipt of BI td X 0 3s When a fault occurs in a radial network the fault current flows through the circuit between the source and the location of the fault td Xs m the protection units upstream from the fault are triggered m the protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered m only the first protection unit upstream from the fault should trip Each Sepam is capable of sending and receiving blocking information except for e g radial distribution with use of time based discrimination td motor Sepams which can
57. RS232 port 1 2 wire RS 485 port 1 2 wire RS 485 port 1 Ethernet port 10 100 base Tx 1 Ethernet port 10 100 base Tx and 1 Ethernet port 100 base Fx Port to Sepam 1 2 wire RS 485 port 1 2 wire RS 485 port 1 2 wire RS 485 port 2 2 wire or 4 wire RS485 ports 2 2 wire RS 485 or 4 wire RS485 ports Distributed power supply RS485 Supplied by ACE Supplied by ACE Supplied by ACE Not supplied by EGX Not supplied by EGX Protocol Modbus u E u E u CEI 60870 5 103 DNP3 B u i Alimentation DC 24 to 48 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC AC 110 to 220 V AC 110 to 220 V AC 100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC with adapter with adapter See details on page 6 33 6 35 6 35 See EGX200 manual See EGX400 manual 6 24 S Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE51659 Installation Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 1 communication port PCRED301006EN June 2005 CCA612 Communication interface connection CCA612 connection cord Cord used to connect a communication interface to a Sepam base unit m length lt 3m m fitted with 2 green RJ45 plugs Sepam communication interface connection Sepam series 80 DE51660 ACE937 Sepam series 80 2 communication ports Connection to the communication network 2 shielded twisted pairs 1 shielded twisted pair RS 485 medium Distributed power supply 1 shie
58. Sepam and the indication given by the device connected to the analog output 8 DE 7 33 Commissioning Test sheet Sepam series 40 9 2 ee ee eee Type of Sepam SMC glej HR A MNE AR NE TAKA Serial number i CubiClE i iii iii said aka lei sated anal nea dices Software version V Type of check Preliminary general examination prior to energizing o Energizing o Parameter and protection settings o Logic input connection o Logic output connection o Validation of the complete protection chain o Validation of the customized logic functions if necessary o Analog output connection to the MSA141 module if necessary o Temperature sensor input connection to the MET148 2 module for type T40 T42 M41 G40 o Type of check Test performed Result Display Phase current and phase Secondary injection of CT CT rated primary current voltage input connection rated current ME a ini o ie 1 Aor5A 2 Siesta KEE Secondary injection of phase VT rated primary phase to neutral voltage the value to be voltage Uns v3 VE nie o injected depends on the test being performed WO en VI Si nini Phase displacement g V I 0 OU ERA RENER oO Q2 HS tisisisneresseiss kije JE RE RE RIMA Tests performed on aii im sa mmm m m E an mn Signatures Be m a NO Comments 7 34 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Commissioning Test sheets Sepam series 40 ad 9 07 ee ee e
59. Sepam components m base unit 1 o A base unit connector power supply output relay CSH30 120 200 or ACE990 input Screw type connector shown CCA620 or ring lug connector CCA622 o 1 5 CT A current input connector CCA630 or LPCT current input connector CCA670 o communication module link connection green o remote inter module link connection black o voltage input connection screw type connector shown CCA626 or ring lug connector CCA627 m optional input output module 2 MES114 o M MES114 module connectors o K MES114 module connector ef g e E ie o 2 o Pi i o a Oo iry 014 o o o o 9 o o 7918 5 kel o e o 79 sis 1 P o 2 On E o T oE S sossosseososo S O D Ee Bi o o 11 1264 10 o l y 02 n4 lt o 2 ho gt asda o L 2 7 o 8 I24 lt 8 o 9 5 3 Dn 2337 o o a y0 o 1224 6 o F ip ipTi o j o 5 L5 o 2 o l Dn il g oli o o ot 2 2 a o lji gt Mml2i lt E 3 HR s Connection of the base unit The Sepam connections are made to the removable connectors located on the rear panel All the connectors are screw lockable For safety reasons access to dangerous potentials all the terminals must be screwed tight whether or not they are used Wiring of the CCA620 and CCA626 connectors m without fittin
60. T t k Example Data type of time delay standard inverse time SIT set point Is a point k on the operation curve k 3 5 Is 4 s Question What is the time delay T setting operation time at 10 Is Reading of the table SIT column line 3 5 Is K 1 86 Answer The time delay setting is T ra z 2 15s Problem 3 Knowing the current Is and time delay T settings for a type of time delay standard inverse very inverse extremely inverse find the operation time for a current value of IA On the standard curve of the same type read the operation time tsA that corresponds to the relative current IA Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current L 10 The operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings is T tA tsA x Ts10 E i a gt 1 IA Is 10 Wis 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions General IDMT protection functions Another practical method the table below gives the Example values of Data _ts as a function of sk m type of time delay very inverse time VIT Ts10 Is m set point Is m time delay T 0 8 s li SE column that corresponds to Ee Question What is the operation time for the current IA 6 Is of time delay read the value K Ts10 Reading of the table VIT column on the line for IA line L 6
61. The configuration and data files are read in their entirety in Sepam They are transferred adjacently 5 41 Modbus communication 5 42 Disturbance recording If the master requests more exchanges than necessary the exchange number remains unchanged and the number of usable bytes is forced to 0 To guarantee data transfers it is necessary to allow a response time of about 500 ms between each read operation at 2300h The first word transmitted is an exchange word The exchange word comprises two fields m the most significant byte contains the exchange number It is initialized to zero after an energizing operation It is incremented by 1 by Sepam each time a transfer takes place successfully When it reaches the value FF it automatically goes back to zero m the least significant byte contains the number of usable bytes in the data zone It is initialized to zero after an energizing operation and must be different from FFh The exchange word may also have the following values m xxyy the number of usable bytes in the data zone yy must be different from FFh m 0000h no read requeste frame has yet been formulated This is especially the case when Sepam is energized The other words are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant The words that follow the exchange wor
62. These 2 formulas are equivalent when there is no earth fault Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 10 to 500 Unit Ib Accuracy 2 Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical 2 14 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE50412 MT11029 Network diagnosis functions 00 vo Phase displacement 90 ol V1 Phase displacement 1 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Phase displacement 0 Phase displacement 01 62 3 Phase displacement 00 Operation This function give the phase displacement measured between the residual voltage and residual current in the trigonometric sense see diagram The measurement is useful during commissioning to check that the directional earth fault protection unit is connected correctly Two values are available m 0 angle with measured l0 m 02 angle with I0 calculated by sum of phase currents Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 359 Resolution v Accuracy 2 Refresh interval 2 seconds typical Phase displacement 01 02 03 Opera
63. V3 Vd Vi f None None U21 U32 None U21 U32 U13 Vd Vi f V1 V2 V3 VO 67N 67NC 59N U21 External VT U21 VO f U32 U13 V1 V2 V3 Vd Vi 67 47 27D 32P 320 40 27S U21 None U21 f U32 U13 V1 V2 V3 VO Vd Vi 67 47 27D 32P 32Q 40 67N 67NC 59N 27S PCRED301006EN June 2005 Installation Voltage transformers The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the connector item oT o DE52161 SSSOSS A si osso sso ssos8 S S B 11 126 lt 10 114 po gt 125449 8 124448 7 Dns i2347 1224 6 2D E 2 pli Dm aq SSOSSOSSOSSS S ssosss ss ss Connections The connections are made to the removable 6 pin screw type CCA626 or ring lug type CCA627 connectors located on the rear panel Wiring of CCA626 connector m without fitting 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 2 5 mm z AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 1 mm z AWG 24 16 stripped length 8 to 10 mm m with fitting recommended wiring with Telemecanigue fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm tube length 8 2 mm stripped length 8 mm Wiring of CCA627 connector m ring lug connectors 6 35 mm 1 4 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Mer
64. a Modbus device other than Sepam responds to SFT2841 its Modbus address is displayed The text indicates that the device is not a Sepam The Sepam network configuration is saved in a file when the window closes by pressing the OK button Access to Sepam information To establish communication between SFT2841 and a Sepam network select the Sepam network configuration you want and press Connect The Sepam network is displayed in the connection window SFT2841 polls all the eguipment defined in the selected configuration Each Sepam gueried is represented by an icon E pi Sepam series 20 or Sepam series 40 actually connected to the network E E Sepam series 80 actually connected to the network E B Sepam configured but not connected to the network E a Device other than Sepam connected to the network A summary report of each Sepam detected as present is also displayed m Sepam Modbus address m type of application and Sepam identification m any alarms present m any minor major faults present To access parameters settings and operation and maintenance information for a particular Sepam click on the icon for that Sepam SFT2841 then establishes a point to point connection with the selected Sepam 8 EDITH 7 11 Use UMI on front panel Presentation Basic UMI This UMI includes m 2 signal lamps indicating Sepam operating status O green on indicator device on O red J indic
65. and acknowledges by writing the exchange word Sepam updates its event table The events sent by Sepam are not sorted chronologically Structure of event table 1 m exchange word 0040h m event number 1 0041h 0048h m event number 2 0049h 0050h m event number 3 0051h 0058h m event number 4 0059h 0060h Structure of event table 2 m exchange word 0070h m event number 1 0071h 0078h m event number 2 0079h 0080h m event number 3 0081h 0088h m event number 4 0089h 0090h The master has to read a block of 33 words starting at the address 0040h 0070h or 1 word at the address 0040h 0070h 5 22 Time tagging of events Exchange word The exchange word is used to manage a special protocol to be sure not to lose events following a communication problem The event table is numbered for that purpose The exchange word includes two fields m most significant byte MSB exchange number 8 bits 0 255 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 bO9 b08 Exchange number 0 255 Description of the MSB of the exchange word The exchange number contains a numbering byte which identifies the exchanges The exchange number is initialized to zero when Sepam is energized When it reaches its maximum value FFh it automatically returns to 0 Sepam numbers the exchanges and the master acknowledges the numbering m least significant byte LSB number of
66. and encoding Switchgear diagnosis zone Switchgear diagnosis Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Initial value of cumulative breaking current 0290 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Cumulative breaking current 0 lt I lt 2 In 0292 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Cumulative breaking current 2 In lt lt 5 In 0294 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Cumulative breaking current 0296 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA 5 In lt 1 lt 10 In Cumulative breaking current 0298 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA 10 In lt 1 lt 40 In Cumulative breaking current I gt 40 In 029A R 3 4 32NS 1 kA2 Cumulative breaking current 029C R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Reserved 029E Number of operations 02A0 R 3 4 32NS 1 If MES114 Operating time 02A2 R 3 4 32NS 1 ms With MES114 Charging time 02A4 R 3 4 32NS 1 ms With MES114 Configuration and application zone Configuration and application Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Type of application 02CC R 3 Name of application S40 S41 T42 O2CD 02D2 R 3 ASCII 12c Sepam marking 02D3 02DC R 3 ASCII 20c Sepam application version 02DD 02DF R 3 ASCII 6c Modbus address slave number for 02E0 R 3 Level 2 Modbus address slave number for RHM 02E1 R 3 Marking type of equipment 8 02E2 R 3 Type of coupler 0 Modbus 02E3 R 3 Communication version 02E4 R 3 NG MET148 2 n 1 module version 02E5 02E7 R 3 ASCII 6c
67. applicable the generator current terminals to the current test terminal box so as to only supply Sepam s phase 1 current input and therefore obtain a residual current l0X l1 Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box V1 V2 V3 N m turn the generator on m apply a V N voltage set to the rated secondary voltage of the VTs installed in an open delta arrangement i e depending on the case Uns V3 or Uns 3 m when applicable inject an current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs i e 1 A or 5 A and in phase with the voltage applied i e generator phase displacement o V N 0 m use the SFT2841 software to check the following o the value indicated for the measured VO residual voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vnp Unp 3 o when applicable the value indicated for the calculated 10 residual current is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CTs o when applicable the value indicated for the phase displacement 90x VO 10x between the I0 current and VO voltage is approximately equal to 0 m turn the generator off 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Commissioning Checking of residual current and residual voltage input connection Description Procedure Check to be carried out when the residual voltage is m connect according to the diagram below d
68. application viewpoint are grouped together in adjacent address zones Synchronization zone 0002 0005 3 16 Identification zone 0006 000F 3 Event table 1 Exchange word 0040 0040 3 6 16 Events 1 to 4 0041 0060 3 Event table 2 Exchange word 0070 0070 3 6 16 Events 1 to 4 0071 0090 3 Data Remote control orders OOFO OOFO 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 150 Remote control confirmation 00F1 00F1 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Status 0100 0112 3 4 1 20 Measurements 0113 0158 3 4 Diagnosis 0159 0185 3 4 Phase displacement 01A0 01A9 3 4 Tripping context 0250 0275 3 4 Switchgear diagnosis 0290 02A5 3 4 Application 02CC O2FE 3 Test zone 0C00 OCOF 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Protection settings Read zone 1 1E00 1E7C 3 Read reguest zone 1 1E80 1E80 3 6 16 Remote settings zone 1 1F00 1F7C 3 6 Read zone 2 2000 207C 3 Read request zone 2 2080 2080 3 6 16 Remote settings zone 2 2100 217C 3 16 Disturbance recording Choice of transfer function 2200 2203 3 16 Identification zone 2204 2271 3 Disturb rec exchange word 2300 2300 3 6 16 Disturbance recording data 2301 237C 3 Note non addressable zones may reply by an exception message or else supply non significant data 1 Zones accessible in word mode or bit mode The address of bit i 0 lt i s F of address word J is then J x 16 i Example 0C00 bit 0 C000 0CO0O0 bit 7 C007 5 8 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus commu
69. braid supplied for connection to Eu cubicle grounding Type Screw terminals Protective earth Screw terminal DE51845 DE51962 2 wire RS485 communication ports S LAN or E LAN m connection of RS485 twisted pair S LAN or E LAN to black terminals A and B m connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to green terminals V and V m the interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable o the network cable must be stripped o the cable shielding must be rolled back and in contact with the clamp o shielding continuity of incoming and outgoing cables is ensured by the electrical continuity of the clamps m all cable clamps are linked by an internal connection to the earthing terminals of the ACE969 interface protective and functional earthing i e the shielding of the RS485 cables is earthed as well m on the ACE969TP interface the cable clamps for the S LAN and E LAN RS485 networks are earthed Fiber optic communication port S LAN The fiber optic connection can be made m point to point to an optic star system m ina ring system active echo The sending and receiving fiber optics fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors The fiber optics are screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50035 Installation ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter PCRED301006EN
70. certain synchronous motors it may be necessary to inhibit the protection function during motor starting This is done using the Starting in progress output of the 48 51LR function in the equation editor MT11184 Block diagram overpower reverse power MT11168 time delayed output pick up output Characteristics Tripping direction Setting overpower reverse power Qs set point Setting 5 Sn to 120 Sn Resolution 0 1 var Accuracy 5 for Qs between 5 Sn and 40 Sn 3 for Qs between 40 Sn and 120 Sn 93 5 5 Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 2 or from 10 ms to 35 ms Characteristic times Operation time lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 90 ms Reset time lt 80 ms 1 Sn v3 Unp in 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT10426 MT10865 8 8 E Protection functions Operation This protection is single phase m it picks up when phase 1 current drops below the Is set point m it is inactive when the current is less than 10 of Ib m it is insensitive to current drops breaking due to circuit breaker tripping m it includes a definite time delay T Tripping of the undercurrent protection may be inhibited by the logic input Inhibit undercurrent Operating principle pick up signal time delayed output l Cas
71. communication network Data available The data available depend on the type of Sepam Measurement readout m phase and earth fault currents m peak demand phase currents m tripping currents m cumulative breaking current m phase to phase phase to neutral and residual voltages m active reactive and apparent power m active and reactive energy frequency temperatures thermal capacity used starts per hour and inhibit time running hours counter motor starting current and time operating time before overload tripping waiting time after tripping operating time and number of operations circuit breaker charging time Program logic data readout m a table of 144 pre assigned remote indications TS depends on the type of Sepam enables the readout of program logic data status m readout of the status of 10 logic inputs Remote control orders Writing of 16 impulse type remote control orders TC in either direct mode or SBO Select Before Operate mode via 16 selection bits Other functions m reading of Sepam configuration and identification m time tagging of events synchronization via the network or externally via logic input 121 time tagging within a millisecond m remote reading of Sepam settings m remote setting of protection units m remote control of the analog output with MSA141 option m transfer of disturbance recording data 1 Modbus is a Modicon registered trademark PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT10524
72. conditions Confirmed SBO remote control order select before operate In this mode remote control orders involve two steps m selection by the master of the order to be sent by writing the bit in the STC word and checking of the selection by rereading the word m execution of the order to be sent by writing the bit in the TC word The remote control order is executed if the bit in the STC word and the bit in the associated word are set the program logic resets the STC bit and TC bits to zero after the remote control order is acknowledged Deselection of the STC bit takes place m if the master deselects it by writing in the STC word m if the master selects write bit a bit other than the one already selected m if the master sets a bit in the TC word which does not match the selection In this case no remote control order is executed 5 20 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication Presentation The communication system time tags the data processed by Sepam The time tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes so that they can be accurately classified over time Time tagged data are events that can be processed in the control room by the remote monitoring and control system using the communication protocol for the data logging and chronological display functions Sepam time tags the following data m logic inputs m remote indications m information pertaining to Sepam equipment see Sepam chec
73. go to www modbus org The description below covers a subset of the function adapted to Sepam series 40 Implementation Request frame The request frame is made of the following components Field Size bytes Slave number 1 43 2Bh 1 Generic access function code 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 01 or 02 1 Type of read 00 1 Object number CRC16 2 The type of read is used to select a simplified 01 or a standard 02 description Sepam series 40 identification Reply frame The objects making up the Sepam series 40 The reply frame is made of the following components identification are listed below Field Size bytes Number Type Value Slave number 1 0 VendorName Merlin Gerin 43 2Bh 1 Generic access function code 1 ProductCode Application EAN13 code 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 2 MajorMinorRevision Application version number 01 or 02 1 Type of read Vx yy 02 1 Conformity level 3 VendorURL www schneider electric com 00 1 Continuation frame flag none for Sepam 4 ProductName Sepam series 40 00 1 Reserved 5 ModelName Application name n 1 Number of objects according to read type e g M41 Motor Obj1 1 Number of first object 6 UserAppName Sepam marking Ig1 1 Length first object txt Ig1 ASCII string of first object objn 1 Number n h object Ign 1 Length n h object txtn Ign ASCII string of n object CRC16 2 PCRED301006EN June 2005
74. has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m if gt 40 In tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In In current transformer rated current defined when the general settings are made Block diagram time delayed output pick up signal Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is time delayed output l l gt Is pick up signal l l l l MT10541 tripping l l l L value of internal l l l time delay l l I I l l Le I I l l counter l l I l PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IECIEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT10527 m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves gt Is time delayed output Voltage restrained phase o
75. in echo mode the Modbus master will receive the echo of its own reguest before the slave s reply The Modbus master must be able to disregard this echo Otherwise it is impossible to create a Modbus fiber optic ring PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50621 PE50622 Modbus communication blodbus parameters SFT2841 Modbus advanced parameters window Cone carina sis Li sd udi jie T Laha SFT2841 communication configuration window for ACE969FO PCRED301006EN June 2005 Configuring the communication interfaces Configuring Modbus advanced parameters The Sepam remote control mode is selected from the Advanced parameters window Advanced parameters Authorized values Default value Remote control mode Direct or SBO Select Direct Before Operate mode Configuring the physical layer of the ACE969 E LAN port The E LAN port on the ACE969TP and ACE969FO communication interfaces is a 2 wire RS 485 port The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the E LAN port are m Sepam address m transmission speed m parity check type Parameters Authorized values Default value Sepam address 1 to 247 1 Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds 38400 bauds Parity None Even or Odd Odd Configuration tips m The Sepam address MUST be assigned before Sepam is connected to the communication network m You are also strongly advised to set the other physical layer configuration parameters before
76. interface status m LED off ACE969 set up and communication operational m LED flashing ACE969 not set up or setup incorrect m LED remains on ACE969 has faulted 6 Service connector reserved for software upgrades 7 E LAN 2 wire RS485 communication port ACE969TP and ACE969FO 8 S LAN 2 wire RS485 communication port DE51855 DE51856 ACE969TP 9 S LAN fiber optic communication port ACE969FO 2 wire RS485 communication ports 1 2 wire RS485 network terminal block Port S LAN ACE969TP Port E LAN ACE969TP or m 2 black terminals connection of RS485 twisted ACE969FO pair 2 wires 2 1 m 2 green terminals connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply 2 Indication LEDs m flashing Tx LED Sepam sending m flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 3 Clamps and recovery of shielding for two network cables incoming and outgoing inner diameter of clamp 6 mm 4 Fixing stud for network cable ties 5 Jumper for RS485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Rc 150 Q to be set to a ie if the interface is not at the line end default position m Rc if the interface is at the line end DE51863 DE51864 BP Fi O Old 6 6 S LAN ZN E LAN V V A B i Too V V A B Too gt lt IS O k Fiber optic communication port 1 Indication LEDs
77. is adapted for the type of current transformer 1 A or 5 A by the number of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT m 5 A rating 4 turns m 1 A rating 2 turns Connection to 5 A secondary circuit Connection to 1 A secondary circuit PE50033 PE50034 m plug into the connector m plug into the connector m insert the transformer secondary wire m insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 core balance CT through the CSH30 core balance CT 4 times twice Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current 10 input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam series 80 m to residual current 10 input on connector terminals 15 and 14 shielding m to residual current I 0 input on connector ce terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended cable m sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid m minimum cable cross section 0 93 mm AWG 18 max 2 5 mm m resistance per unit length lt 100 mQ m m minimum dielectric strength 1000 V 700 Vrms It is essential for the CSH30 to be installed near Sepam Sepam CSH30 link less than 2 meters long Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not be more than 4Q DE52082 1 ACT 2 turns 5 ACT 4
78. lt IsO lt Ind expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt Ino With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2Ato2A 5 A rating O5Ato5A 20 A rating 2Ato20A CT CSH30 0 1 Ino lt IsO lt InO min 0 1 A Core balance CT with ACE990 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt Ind Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 2 5 or 0 01 Ino Drop out pick up ratio Harmonic 2 restraint 93 5 5 with CSH sensor CT CSH30 or core balance CT ACE990 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 InO IsO x 100 sum of CTs 1 In0 In if the sum of the three phase currents is used for the Fixed threshold 17 5 measurement Time delay T operation time at 10 Is0 o ana rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH core Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s InO In of the CT at In 10 according to parameter setting if the IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 sor TMS measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5A current transformer Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Accuracy 2 Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms 3 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode IDMT Inverse SIT and IECIEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Definite time i hee ey and IEC EIT C A pa ia pa timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s moderately inverse
79. m comer witne exception orme remoto control 8 Inhibit disturbance recording triggering OPG E E E E E E M tripping order TC1 which can be activated arany ume 9 Confirm disturbance recording triggering OPG E E E E E E M The parameter setting of the logic input may be done in 10 Manual disturbance recording triggering OPG E E E E E E M imo modes 11 Enable recloser E E m m inhibition if the input is at 1 12 Disable racloser m s s m inhibition if the input is at O negative input 13 Confirm thermal protection a ne The device tripping and closing and recloser enabling Z 14 Reset undercurrent protection L and disabling remote control orders are acknowledged if the CB control function is confirmed and if the inputs required for that logic are present on the MES114 or MES108 optional module Direct remote control order The remote control order is executed when it is written in the remote control word The program logic resets it to zero after the remote control order is acknowledged 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 1 OPG French acronym for disturbance recording Remote control of the analog output The analog output of the MSA141 module may be set up for remote control via the Modbus communication link word address 010F The usable range of the numerical value transmitted is defined by the min value and max value settings of the analog output This function is not affected by remote control inhibition
80. only send blocking information tripping time definite time curves When a Sepam is triggered by a fault current m it sends a blocking information to output O3 2 m it trips the associated circuit breaker if it does not receive a blocking information on the logic input assigned to receipt of BI The sending of the blocking information lasts the time it takes to clear the fault It is interrupted after a time delay that takes into account the breaking device operating time and protection unit reset time This system minimizes the duration of the fault optimizes discrimination and guarantees safety in downgraded situations wiring or switchgear failure Pilot wire test The pilot wire test may be performed using the output relay test function A 1 Motor Sepams are not affected by the receipt of a blocking information since they are designed for loads only 2 Default parameter setting 3 According to parameter setting and presence of an additional MES114 module e g radial distribution with use of the Sepam logic discrimination system PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 4 9 DE50465 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination functions ANSI code 68 Radial network Block diagram Sepam S40 S41 T40 T42 G40 overcurrent inst unit 1 zrl inst unit 2 Parin touit output Oxx send BI inst unit inst unit 2 z 1 to
81. phase current Im1 x 10 013B R 3 4 16NS 1A Average phase current Im2 x 10 013C R 3 4 16NS 1A Average phase current Im3 x 10 013D R 3 4 16NS 1A Peak demand phase current IM1 x 10 013E R 3 4 16NS 1A Peak demand phase current IM2 x 10 013F R 3 4 16NS 1A Peak demand phase current IM3 x 10 0140 R 3 4 16NS 1A Phase to phase voltage U21 x 10 0141 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to phase voltage U32 x 10 0142 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to phase voltage U13 x 10 0143 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to neutral voltage V1 x 10 0144 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to neutral voltage V2 x 10 0145 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to neutral voltage V3 x 10 0146 R 3 4 16NS 10V Residual voltage VO x 10 0147 R 3 4 16NS 10V Positive sequence voltage Vd x 10 0148 R 3 4 16NS 10V Negative seguence voltage Vi x 10 0149 R 3 4 16NS 10V Freguency 014A R 3 4 16NS 0 01 Hz Active power P x 100 014B R 3 4 16S 100 kw Reactive power Q x 100 014C R 3 4 16S 100 kvar Apparent power S x 100 014D R 3 4 16S 100 kVA Peak demand active power Pm x 100 014E R 3 4 16S 100 kW Peak demand reactive power Qm x 100 014F R 3 4 16S 100 kvar Power factor cos x 100 0150 R 3 4 16S 0 01 Positive active energy Ea x 1 0151 0152 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kW h Energie active n gative Ea x 1 0153 0154 R 3 4 2 x 16NS 100 kW h Positive reactive energy Er x 1 0155 0156 R 3 4 2 x 16NS 100 kvar h Negative reactive energy Er x 1 0157 0158 R 3 4 2 x 16NS 100 kvar h 5 12 PCRED301006EN J
82. possible Sepam like all electronic units should not be stored in a damp environment for more than a month Sepam should be energized as quickly as possible If this is not possible the cubicle reheating system should be activated Environment of the installed Sepam Operation in a damp environment The temperature relative humidity factors must compatible with the unit s environmental withstand characteristics If the use conditions are outside the normal zone commissioning arrangements should be made such as air conditioning of the premises Operation in a polluted atmosphere A contaminated industrial atmosphere components such as the presence of chlorine hydrofluoric acid sulfur solvents may cause corrosion of the electronic components in which case environmental control arrangements should be made such as closed pressurized premises with filtered air for commissioning The effect of corrosion on Sepam has been tested according to the IEC 60068 2 60 standard Sepam is certified level C under the following test conditions 21 days 25 C 75 relative humidity 1 ppm H2S 0 5 ppm SOz 6 2 Precautions Equipment identification Equipment identification Identification of the base unit Each Sepam comes in a single package which contains the base unit and 2 connectors m 1 connector 20 points CCA620 or CCA622 m 1 connector 6 points CCA626 or CCA627 The other optional accessories such as module
83. pulse metering Operation This function is used for energy metering via logic inputs Energy incrementing is associated with each input one of the general parameters to be set Each input pulse increments the meter 4 inputs and 4 accumulated energy metering options are available m positive and negative active energy m positive and negative reactive energy The accumulated active and reactive energy values are saved in the event of a power failure Readout m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Active energy Reactive energy Metering capacity 0 to 2 1 108 MW h 0 to 2 1 108 Mvar h Unit MW h Mvar h Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits Resolution 0 1 MW h 0 1 Mvar h Increment 0 1 kW h to 5 MW 0 1 kvar h to 5 Mvar h Impulse 15 ms min 15 ms min 8 DEL 2 11 Metering functions 2 12 Temperature Operation This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors RTDs m platinum Pt100 100 Q at 0 C in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards m nickel 100 Q or 120 Q at 0 C Each RTD channel gives one measurement tx RTD x temperature The function also indicates RTD faults m RTD disconnected tx gt 205 C m RTD shorted tx lt 35 C In the event of a fault display of the value is inhibited The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm Read
84. sendBi directional earth fault inst unit 1 directional overcurrent inst unit 1 T 6 ee T 200 ms inhibit send BI send BI _ if fault not cleared _ receive BI overcurrent time delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 earth fault time delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 for time based di i h taul discrimination irectional earth fault delayed unit 2 directional overcurrent time delay settings v SSL tripping delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 overcurrent logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 earth fault logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 directional earth fault logic delayed unit 1 time delay settings for logic discrimination V Blocking reception logic input Block diagram Sepam M41 g overcurrent inst unit 1 D ul a inst unit 2 output Oxx send BI earth fault to send BI inst unit 1 z inst unit 2 T 0 H s 2 _ directional earth fault T 200 ms inst unit 1 are ue inhibit send BI if fault not cleared overcurrent delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 earth fault delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 SSL tripping ANI a directional earth fault logic delayed unit 1 The protection units must be configured to trip the circuit breaker in order to be taken into account in logic discrimination 1 According to parameter setting O3 by default 2 Inst
85. sensor 5 E E E Mm 75 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 6 E E m m 76 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 6 E E E m 77 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 7 E E m 78 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 7 E mn m 79 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 8 E E m 80 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 8 E E m Address word 0106 TS81 to TS96 Bit address 1060 to 106F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 81 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 1 E mn m 82 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 1 E m m 83 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 2 E E m 84 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 2 E mn m 85 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 3 E E m 86 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 3 E E mn m 87 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 4 E E m 88 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 4 E mn m 89 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 5 E E m 90 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 5 E mn m 91 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 6 E mn m 92 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 6 E Nm Mm 93 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 7 E mn m 94 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 7 E E m 95 P
86. than 205 C measurement displayed If an RTD fault is detected the set point output relays are inhibited the protection outputs are set to zero The RTD fault item is also made available in the control matrix and an alarm message is generated specifying the faulty RTD module Block diagram T lt 205 C T gt Tst gt set point 1 MT10878 RTD T gt Ts2 gt setpoint 2 P RTD s fault Characteristics Ts1 and Ts2 set points c F Setting 0 C to 180 C 32 F to 356 F Accuracy 1 1 5 C 2 7 F Resolution 1 C 1 F Pick up drop out difference 3 C 0 5 Characteristic times Tripping time lt 5 seconds 1 See connection of MET148 2 module chapter for accuracy derating according to wiring cross section Standard RTD assignments The standard assignments described below may be selected when the first MET148 2 module is configured SFT2841 hardware configuration screen It is com pulsory to choose an assignment in order to use the thermal overload Cooling time constant calculation function Motor generator Transformer choice choice M41 G40 T40 T42 RTD 1 Stator 1 Phase 1 T1 RTD 2 Stator 2 Phase 1 T2 RTD 3 Stator 3 Phase 2 T1 RTD 4 Bearing 1 Phase 2 T2 RTD5 Bearing 2 Phase 3 T1 RTD6 Bearing 3 Phase 3 T2 RTD 7 Bearing 4 RTD8 Ambient temperature Ambient temperature 3 12 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED30
87. the Sepam parameter and protection settings It allows users to go through all the data input screens in the natural order The sequencing of the screens in guided mode is controlled by clicking on 2 icons in the toolbar m to go back to the previous screen m gt to go to the next screen The screens are linked up in the following order Sepam hardware configuration General characteristics CT VT supervision Program logic Password Setting screens for the protection functions available according to the type of Sepam 7 Logical equation editor 8 Various tabs of the control matrix 9 Disturbance recording setup Qo PO Nos On line help The operator may look up on line help at any time via the 2 command in the menu bar To use the on line help a browser such as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer MS is required PCRED301006EN June 2005 SFT2841 setting and operating software General screen organization oO eee ohh Oe Fee dir Tei or iii 2 Hie rno aaa Sper Proper Pemai HMarewars z onigi ation MT11192 ez uri ee nini O bp mmiri etd kami mirni OES U ki mni jihin bed LEN RR FE HU pri miga zla D mV RJA aig menjaj F miki kli cd neje E HB ferent reva rabil ara Me TIV ji mga uran i eS T Brett tng radia leni Re Feri vara UH malin ey PEU Gee ONE AH eer morji LETNI Cope Ce eee D arerin ork MT11193 a ry f z Tilo a FSE FS ar Sa Cn V ZSM c
88. the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Starting overload time Measurement range 0 to 300 s Unit s or ms Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 10 msor 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical Starting overload current Measurement range 1 2 Ib to 24 In Unit A or kA Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 A or 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Or 65 5 kA 8 Merin Gerin 2 19 Machine operation assistance functions 2 20 Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time delay Number of starts before inhibition Operation The number of starts allowed before inhbition is calculated by the number of starts protection function The number of starts depends on the thermal state of the motor Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Resetting to zero The number of starts counters may be reset to zero as follows after the entry of a password N m on the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the D key m on the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 60 Unit none Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical Sta
89. the function recovery of Sepam files start up of SFT2826 m consultation of the history of the last 64 Sepam alarms with time tagging m access to Sepam diagnostic data in the Sepam tab box included in Sepam diagnosis m in Parameter setting mode the switchgear diagnositic values may be modified operation counter cumulative breaking current to reset the values after a change of breaking device PCRED301006EN June 2005 Use SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Connection window The SFT2841 software connection window is used m to select an existing Sepam network or configure a new one m to set up the connection to the selected Sepam network m to select one Sepam unit from the network and access its parameters settings and operation and maintenance information Configuration of a Sepam network Several configurations can be defined for the various Sepam installations A Sepam network configuration is identified by a name It is saved on the SFT2841 PC in a file in the SFT2841 installation directory default C Program Files Schneider SFT2841 Net Configuration of a Sepam network is in 2 parts m configuration of the communication network m configuration of the Sepam units Configuration of the communication network To configure the communication network first define m the type of link between the PC and the Sepam network m the communication parameters according to the type
90. the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 06 to 1 2 Vnp Unit V or kV Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 Vnp 2 from 0 06 to 0 5 Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp V3 2 At Vnp in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Metering functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage Residual voltage Operation This function gives the value of the residual voltage VO V1 V2 V3 VO is measured m by taking the internal sum of the 3 phase voltages m by an open star delta VT It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 04 Vnp to 3 Vnp Unit V or kV Accuracy 1 from 0 5 to 3 Vnp 2 from 0 05 to 0 5 Vnp 5 from 0 04 to 0 05 Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh in
91. the phase currents may be set for each unit by default units 1 and 2 set to I0 and units 2 and 4 to l0x By mixing the 2 possibilities on the different units it is possible to have m different dynamic set points m different applications e g zero sequence and tank earth leakage protection Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves 10 gt IsO time delayed output I 10 gt IsO pick up signal l l l l l bani i tripping DE50247 l l l I l I l L value of internal l l l l l time delay I l l l l counter I l T te PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions DE50248 Earth fault ANSI 50N 51N code or 50G 51G m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves 10 gt IsO time delayed output 10 gt IsO pick up signal I i tripping time delay counter l l l l value of internal l l l Characteristics Tripping curve Setting Definite time IDMT chosen according to list page 3 30 IsO set point Definite time setting 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 Ind expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 Ino With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2Ato 30A 5 A rating 0 5 Ato 75A 20 A rating 2 A to 300 A CT CSH30 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 InO min 0 1 A Core balance CT with ACE990 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 Ind IDMT time setting 0 1 Ind
92. this protection Motor re acceleration When the motor re accelerates it consumes a current in the vicinity of the starting current gt Is without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of Ib The ST time delay which corresponds to the normal starting time may be reinitialized by the logic input motor re acceleration which m reinitialize the excessive starting time protection m set the locked rotor protection LT time delay to a low value Starting is detected when the current consumed is 10 greater than the Ib curent An output is set when starting is in progress to be used in the equation editor Block diagram isi starting s amp gt in progress DE50460 tripping M output V locked rotor after starting 11 logic input p 12 motor 13 re acceleration excessive starting time locked rotor 8 on start logic input __g rotor rotation detection Characteristics Is set point Setting 50 Ib lt Is lt 500 Ib Resolution 1 Accuracy 1 5 Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Time delay ST LT and LTS Setting ST 500 ms lt T lt 300 s LT 50 ms lt T lt 300 s LTS 50 ms lt T lt 300 s 10 ms or 1 digit 2 or from 25 ms to 40 ms Resolution Accuracy 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT10858 MT10419 Protection functions Description This function is u
93. to 300 of rated thermal capacity Cold curve modification factor 0 to 100 Switching of thermal settings conditions By logic input By Is set point adjustable from 0 25 to 8 Ib Maximum equipment temperature 60 to 200 C ANSI 50 51 Phase overcurrent Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is set point 0 1 to 24 In Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 2 4 In IDMT 0 1 sto 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 20 s Confirmation None By negative sequence overvoltage By phase to phase undervoltage ANSI 50BF Breaker failure Presence of current 0 2 to 2 In Operating time 0 05 s to 300 s 1 Tripping as of 1 2 Is 2 Sn v3 In Unp PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 3 3 Protection functions ANSI 50N 51N or 50G 51G Earth fault Sensitive earth fault Setting ranges Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT IsO set point 0 1 to 15 Ind Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 1 Ino IDMT 0 1 sto 12 5 s at 10Is0 Timer hold Definite time
94. to go into the fail safe position m The rated primary current In measured by the LPCT sensors is to be entered as a Sepam general setting and configured by microswitches on the CCA670 connector 7 28 Checking of phase current and voltage input connection LPCT type current sensors Procedure The tests to be carried out to check phase current input connections are the same whether the phase currents are measured by CTs or LPCT sensors Only the Sepam current input connection procedure and current injection values change To test current inputs connected to LPCT sensors with a standard injection box the ACE917 injection adapter is required The ACE917 adapter is inserted between m the standard injection box m the LPCT test plug O integrated in the Sepam CCA670 connector o or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory The ACE917 injection adapter should be set according to the currents selected on the CCA670 connector the ACE917 setting should be egual to the number of the microswitch that is set to 1 on the CCA670 The injection value depends on the rated primary current selected on the CCA670 connector and entered in the Sepam general settings i e m 1 A for the following values in Amps 25 50 100 133 200 320 400 630 m 5A for the following values in Amps 125 250 500 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 Block diagram without CCA613 accessory
95. to the Sepam m based on positive sequence voltage if the Sepam includes U21 and U32 measurements Frequency is not measured if m the voltage U21 or positive sequence voltage Vd is less than 40 of Un m the frequency is outside the measurement range Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the RA key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Rated freguency 50 Hz 60 Hz Range 25 to 65 Hz Accuracy 1 0 02 Hz Display format 3 significant digits Resolution On SFT2841 0 01 Hz On Sepam display 0 1 Hz Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 At Unp in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 8 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Metering functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Active reactive and apparent power Operation This function gives the power values m P active power v3 U I cos g m O reactive power v3 U I sin 9 m S apparent power v3 U l The function measures the active and reactive power in 3 wire 3 phase arrangements by means of the two wattmeter method The powers are obtained based on the phase to phase voltages U21 and U32 and the phase currents 11 and 13 When only the voltage U21 is connected P and Q are calculated assuming that the system voltage is balanced According to standard practice it is considered that m for
96. turns PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 6 15 PE50037 DE51681 Installation ACE990 Core balance CT interface Function The ACE990 interface is used to adapt measurements between a MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1 n 50 lt n lt 1500 and the Sepam residual current input Characteristics Weight 0 64 kg Assembly Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail Amplitude accuracy 1 Phase accuracy lt 2 Maximum permissible current 20 kA 1s on the primary winding of a MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1 50 that does not saturate ACE990 core balance CT interface Operating temperature 5 C to 55 C Storage temperature 25 C to 70 C Description and dimensions E ACE990 input terminal block for connection of the core balance CT S ACE990 output terminal block for connection of the Sepam residual current input E1 E2E3E4E5 Td HI MERLIN GERIN K S1 S2 memo 6 16 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE51682 Installation ACE990 Example Given a core balance CT with a ratio of 1 400 2 VA used within a measurement range of 0 5 A to 60 A How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990 f 2 3 Choose a close approximation of the rated current Ino ie 5 A Calculate the ratio approx In0 number of turns 5 400 0 0125 Find the closest value of k in the table opposite k 0 01136 Check the mininum power r
97. used ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO m select the Modbus communication protocol The configuration parameters will vary depending on the communication interface selected ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO The table below specifies the parameters to be configured depending on the communication interface chosen Parameters to be configured ACE949 ACE969TP ACE969FO ACE959 ACE937 Physical layer parameters u L Fiber optic parameters Modbus advanced parameters L E LAN parameters Configuring the physical layer of the Modbus port Asynchronous serial transmission is used with the following character format m 8 data bits m 1 stop bit m parity according to parameter setting The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the Modbus port are m slave number Sepam address m transmission speed m parity check type Parameters Authorized values Default value Sepam address 1 to 247 1 Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 19200 bauds 38400 bauds Parity None Even or Odd Even Configuring the ACE969FO fiber optic port The configuration for the physical layer of the ACE969FO fiber optic port is completed with the following 2 parameters m Link idle state light on or light off m Echo mode with or without Fiber optic parameters Authorized values Default value Link idle state Light Off or Light On Light Off Echo mode Yes fiber optic ring No or No fiber optic star Note
98. without forced ventilation ONAN ONAF m two speed motors The protection function comprises two groups of settings and each group is suitable for equipment protection in one of the two operating rates The eguipment s basis current used to calculate heat rise also depends on the operating rate m with rate 1 the basis current Ib defined as a general Sepam parameter is used to calculate the heat rise in the equipment m with rate 2 the basis current lb rate 2 a specific thermal overload protection setting is used to calculate the heat rise in the equipment Block diagram logic input switching of z thermal settings selection of parameter leg gt Isj group calculation of eguivalent l inverse current Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Switching from one group of thermal settings to the other is done without losing the heat rise value It is controlled m either via a logic input assigned to the switching of thermal settings function m or when the phase current reaches an adjustable Is set point to be used to process the switching of thermal settings of a motor with locked rotor User information The following information is available for the user m heat rise m learnt cooling time constant T2 m time before restart enabled in case of inhibition of starting m time before tripping with constant current See chapter Machine operation assistance functions Ch
99. 0 0003 0 0002 0 0002 0 0001 110 0 0045 0 0042 0 0034 0 0029 0 0024 0 0021 0 0018 0 0016 0 0014 0 0013 0 0011 0 0010 0 0006 0 0004 0 0003 0 0003 115 0 0068 0 0063 0 0051 0 0043 0 0036 0 0031 0 0027 0 0024 0 0021 0 0019 0 0017 0 0015 0 0010 0 0007 0 0005 0 0004 120 00091 0 0084 0 0069 0 0057 0 0049 0 0042 0 0036 0 0032 0 0028 0 0025 0 0022 0 0020 0 0013 0 0009 0 0007 0 0005 125 0 0114 0 0105 0 0086 0 0072 0 0061 0 0052 0 0045 0 0040 0 0035 0 0031 0 0028 0 0025 0 0016 0 0011 0 0008 0 0006 130 00137 0 0126 0 0103 0 0086 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0048 0 0042 0 0038 0 0034 0 0030 0 0019 0 0013 0 0010 0 0008 135 0 0160 0 0147 0 0120 0 0101 0 0085 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0049 0 0044 0 0039 0 0035 0 0023 0 0016 0 0011 0 0009 140 0 0183 0 0168 0 0138 0 0115 0 0097 0 0084 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0050 0 0045 0 0040 0 0026 0 0018 0 0013 0 0010 145 0 0206 0 0189 0 0155 0 0129 0 0110 0 0094 0 0082 0 0072 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0046 0 0029 0 0020 0 0015 0 0011 150 0 0229 0 0211 0 0172 0 0144 0 0122 0 0105 0 0091 0 0080 0 0070 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 155 0 0253 0 0232 0 0190 0 0158 0 0134 0 0115 0 0100 0 0088 0 0077 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0035 0 0025 0 0018 0 0014 160 0 0276 0 0253 0 0207 0 0173 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0096 0 0085 0 0075 0 0067 0 0061 0 0039 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 165 0 0299 0 0275 0 0225 0 0187 0 0159 0 0136 0 0118 0 0104 0 0092 0 0082 0 0073 0 0066 0 0042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 170 0 0323 0 0296 0 0242 0 0202 0 0171 0 0147 0 0128 0 0112 0 0099 0
100. 0 0343 0 0208 0 0261 0 0231 0 0206 0 0185 0 0166 0 0106 0 0074 0 0054 0 0041 170 0 0766 0 0704 0 0578 0 0484 0 0411 0 0353 0 0307 0 0269 0 0238 0 0212 0 0190 0 0171 0 0109 0 0076 0 0056 0 0043 175 0 0790 0 0726 0 0596 0 0498 0 0423 0 0364 0 0316 0 0277 0 0245 0 0218 0 0196 0 0177 0 0113 0 0078 0 0057 0 0044 180 0 0813 0 0747 0 0613 0 0513 0 0435 0 0374 0 0325 0 0285 0 0252 0 0225 0 0201 0 0182 0 0116 0 0080 0 0059 0 0045 185 0 0837 0 0769 0 0631 0 0528 0 0448 0 0385 0 0334 0 0293 0 0259 0 0231 0 0207 0 0187 0 0119 0 0083 0 0061 0 0046 190 0 0861 0 0790 0 0649 0 0542 0 0460 0 0395 0 0344 0 0301 0 0266 0 0237 0 0213 0 0192 0 0122 0 0085 0 0062 0 0048 195 0 0884 0 0812 0 0666 0 0557 0 0473 0 0406 0 0353 0 0309 0 0274 0 0244 0 0218 0 0197 0 0126 0 0087 0 0064 0 0049 200 0 0908 0 0834 0 0684 0 0572 0 0485 0 0417 0 0362 0 0317 0 0281 0 0250 0 0224 0 0202 0 0129 0 0089 0 0066 0 0050 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 23 Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples Hot curves Vib 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 120 1 25 1 30 135 1 40 145 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Es 105 0 6690 0 2719 0 1685 0 1206 0 0931 0 0752 0 0627 0 0535 0 0464 0 0408 0 0363 0 0326 0 0295 0 0268 0 0245 0 0226 110 3 7136 0 6466 0 3712 0 2578 0 1957 0 1566 0 1296 0 1100 0 0951 0 0834 0 0740 0 0662 0 0598 0 0544 0 0497 0 0457 115 1 2528 0 6257 0 4169 0 3102 0 2451 0 2013 0 1699 0 1462 0 1278 0 1131
101. 0 0671 0 0585 0 0515 0 0457 0 0408 0 0367 0 0332 0 0302 165 0 3124 0 2864 0 2639 0 2442 0 1855 0 1468 0 1197 0 0999 0 0847 0 0729 0 0635 0 0559 0 0496 0 0443 0 0398 0 0360 0 0328 170 0 3410 0 3122 0 2874 0 2657 0 2012 0 1591 0 1296 0 1080 0 0916 0 0788 0 0686 0 0603 0 0535 0 0478 0 0430 0 0389 0 0353 175 0 3705 0 3388 0 3115 0 2877 0 2173 0 1715 0 1395 0 1161 0 0984 0 0847 0 0737 0 0648 0 0574 0 0513 0 0461 0 0417 0 0379 180 0 4008 0 3660 0 3361 0 3102 0 2336 0 1840 0 1495 0 1244 0 1054 0 0906 0 0788 0 0692 0 0614 0 0548 0 0493 0 0446 0 0405 185 0 4321 0 3940 0 3614 0 3331 0 2502 0 1967 0 1597 0 1327 0 1123 0 0965 0 0839 0 0737 0 0653 0 0583 0 0524 0 0474 0 0431 190 0 4644 0 4229 0 3873 0 3567 0 2671 0 2096 0 1699 0 1411 0 1193 0 1025 0 0891 0 0782 0 0693 0 0619 0 0556 0 0503 0 0457 195 0 4978 0 4525 0 4140 0 3808 0 2842 0 2226 0 1802 0 1495 0 1264 0 1085 0 0943 0 0828 0 0733 0 0654 0 0588 0 0531 0 0483 200 0 5324 0 4831 0 4413 0 4055 0 3017 0 2358 0 1907 0 1581 0 1335 0 1145 0 0995 0 0873 0 0773 0 0690 0 0620 0 0560 0 0509 3 24 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples Hot curves ib 480 5 00 550 6 00 6 50 7 00 7 50 8 00 850 9 00 9 50 10 00 12 50 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 105 0 0023 0 0021 0 0017 0 0014 0 0012 0 0010 0 0009 0 0008 0 0007 0 0006 0 0006 0 0005
102. 0 1011 0 0911 0 0827 0 0755 0 0693 120 3 0445 0 9680 0 6061 0 4394 0 3423 0 2786 0 2336 0 2002 0 1744 0 1539 0 1372 0 1234 0 1118 0 1020 0 0935 125 1 4925 0 8398 0 5878 0 4499 0 3623 0 3017 0 2572 0 2231 0 1963 0 1747 0 1568 0 1419 0 1292 0 1183 130 2 6626 1 1451 0 7621 0 5705 0 4537 0 3747 0 3176 0 2744 0 2407 0 2136 0 1914 0 1728 0 1572 0 1438 135 1 5870 0 9734 0 7077 0 5543 0 4535 0 3819 0 3285 0 2871 0 2541 0 2271 0 2048 0 1860 0 1699 140 2 3979 1 2417 0 8668 0 6662 0 5390 0 4507 0 3857 0 3358 0 2963 0 2643 0 2378 0 2156 0 1967 145 1 6094 1 0561 0 7921 0 6325 0 5245 0 4463 0 3869 0 3403 0 3028 0 2719 0 2461 0 2243 150 2 1972 1 2897 0 9362 0 7357 0 6042 0 5108 0 4408 0 3864 0 3429 0 3073 0 2776 0 2526 155 3 8067 1 5950 1 1047 0 8508 0 6909 0 5798 0 4978 0 4347 0 3846 0 3439 0 3102 0 2817 160 2 0369 1 3074 0 9808 0 7857 0 6539 0 5583 0 4855 0 4282 0 3819 0 3438 0 3118 165 2 8478 1 5620 1 1304 0 8905 0 7340 0 6226 0 5390 0 4738 0 4215 0 3786 0 3427 170 1 9042 1 3063 1 0076 0 8210 0 6914 0 5955 0 5215 0 4626 0 4146 0 3747 175 2 4288 1 5198 1 1403 0 9163 0 7652 0 6554 0 5717 0 5055 0 4520 0 4077 180 3 5988 1 7918 1 2933 1 0217 0 8449 0 7191 0 6244 0 5504 0 4908 0 4418 185 2 1665 1 4739 1 1394 0 9316 0 7872 0 6802 0 5974 0 5312 0 4772 190 2 7726 1 6946 1 2730 1 0264 0 8602 0 7392 0 6466 0 5733 0 5138 195 4 5643 1 9782 1 4271 1 1312 0 9390 0 8019 0 6985 0 6173 0 5518 200 2 3755 1 6094 1 2483 1 0245 0 8688 0 7531 0 6633 0 5914 Vib 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2
103. 0 V DC and 100 240 V AC power supply 59604 Base unit with advanced UMI 24 250 V DC and 100 240 V AC power supply 59608 DSM303 remote advanced UMI module 59615 Working language English French 59616 Working language English Spanish 59630 CCA630 connector for 1A 5A CT current sensors 59631 CCA670 connector for LPCT current sensors 59634 CSH30 interposing ring CT for 10 input 59635 CSH120 residual current sensor diameter 120 mm 59636 CSH200 residual current sensor diameter 200 mm 59639 AMT852 lead sealing accessory 59641 MET148 2 8 temperature sensor module 59642 ACE949 2 wire RS 485 network interface 59643 ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface 59644 ACE937 fiber optic interface 59646 MES114 10 input 4 output module 24 250 V DC 59647 MSA141 1 analog output module 59648 ACE909 2 RS 485 RS 232 converter 59649 ACE919AC RS 485 RS 485 converter AC power supply 59650 ACE919DC RS 485 RS 485 converter DC power supply 59651 MES114E 10 input 4 output module 110 125 V DC and V AC 59652 MES114F 10 input 4 output module 220 250 V DC and V AC 59656 CCA626 6 pin screw type connector 59657 CCA627 6 pin ring lug connector 59660 CCA770 remote module cord L 0 6 m 59661 CCA772 remote module cord L 2m 59662 CCA774 remot
104. 0 to 359 to Phase displacement 91 92 g3 0 to 359 2 between V and Disturbance recording GO Machine operating assistance Thermal capacity used 0 to 800 41 7 GO 100 for phase Ib Remaining operating time before overload tripping 0 to 999 mn 1 mn Waiting time after overload tripping 0 to 999 mn 1 mn Running hours counter operating time 0 to 65535 hours 1 or 0 5h GO Starting current 1 2 Ib to 24 In 5 GO Starting time O to 300 s 300 ms GO Number of starts before inhibition Oto 60 1 Start inhibit time 0 to 360 mn 1 mn Cooling time constant 5 to 600 mn 5 mn Switchgear diagnosis assistance Cumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA 410 GO Number of operations 0 to 4 109 1 GO Operating time 20 to 100 ms 1 ms GO Charging time 1 to 20s 0 5 s GO m available on MSA141 analog output module according to setup o saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage 1 Typical accuracy see details on subseguent pages 2 Sn apparent power v3 Unp lin 3 Measurement up to 0 02 In for information purpose PCRED301006EN June 2005 2 3 Metering functions 2 4 Phase current Residual current Phase current Operation This function gives the RMS value of the phase currents m 1 phase 1 current m 2 phase 2 current m 3 phase 3 current It is based on RMS current measurement and takes into account harmonics up to number 17 Readout The measurements may be accessed via m t
105. 0088 0 0079 0 0071 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 175 0 0346 0 0317 0 0260 0 0217 0 0183 0 0157 0 0137 0 0120 0 0106 0 0094 0 0084 0 0076 0 0048 0 0034 0 0025 0 0019 180 0 0370 0 0339 0 0277 0 0231 0 0196 0 0168 0 0146 0 0128 0 0113 0 0101 0 0090 0 0081 0 0052 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 185 0 0393 0 0361 0 0295 0 0246 0 0208 0 0179 0 0155 0 0136 0 0120 0 0107 0 0096 0 0086 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 190 00417 0 0382 0 0313 0 0261 0 0221 0 0189 0 0164 0 0144 0 0127 0 0113 0 0101 0 0091 0 0058 0 0040 0 0030 0 0023 195 0 0441 0 0404 0 0330 0 0275 0 0233 0 0200 0 0173 0 0152 0 0134 0 0119 0 0107 0 0096 0 0061 0 0043 0 0031 0 0024 200 0 0464 0 0426 0 0348 0 0290 0 0245 0 0211 0 0183 0 0160 0 0141 0 0126 0 0113 0 0102 0 0065 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 25 Protection functions Description The phase overcurrent function comprises 2 groups of four units called Group A and Group B respectively The mode of switching from one group to the other may be determined by parameter setting m by remote control TC3 TC4 m by logic input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B or by forcing the use of the group Operation The phase overcurrent protection function is three pole It picks up if one two or three of the phase currents reach the operation set point The alarm connected to the operation of the protection function indicates the faulty phase or phases It is time delayed The time delay may be definite time DT or
106. 1 Nh and Nc number of consecutive starts Setting 1 to Nt Resolution 1 T time delay stop start Setting 0 mn s T lt 90 mn Resolution 1 mn or 1 digit 1 With Nh lt Ne 3 36 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Description The directional phase overcurrent function includes 2 groups of 2 units called respectively Group A and Group B The mode for switching from one group to the other may be determined by parameter setting m by remote control TC3 TC4 m by logic input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B or by forcing the use of the group Operation This protection function is three phase It includes a phase overcurrent function associated with direction detection It picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction line or busbar is activated for at least one of the three phases or two out of three phases according to parameter setting The alarm linked to the protection operation indicates the faulty phase or phases It is time delayed and the time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves page 3 39 The direction of the current is determined according to the measurement of the phase in relation to a polarization value It is qualified as busbar direction or line direction according to the following convention MT11175 busbar direction V ine direction The polarization value is the phase to phase value in quadrature with
107. 1 25 pin sub D connector to connect the module to the base unit 2 voltage selector switche for MES114E and MES114F module inputs to be set to o V DC for 10 DC voltage inputs default setting o VAC for 10 AC voltage inputs 3 label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and MES114F input voltages The parameter setting status may be accessed in the Sepam Diagnosis screen of the SFT2841 software tool Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage V AC setting inhibits the operating time measurement function Assembly m insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit m flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2 m tighten the 3 mounting screws Connection Dangerous voltages may be present on the terminal screws whether the terminals are used or not To avoid all danger of electrical shock tighten all terminal screws so that they cannot be touched inadvertently The inputs are potential free and the DC power supply source is external Wiring of connectors W and W m wiring without fitting o 1 wire with maximum cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 o or 2 wires with maximum cross section 0 2 to 1 mm gt AWG 24 16 o stripped length 8 to 10 mm m wiring with fittings o recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for one 1 5 mm wire DZ5CE025D for one 2 5 mm wire AZ5DE010D for two 1 mm wires
108. 1 In values for LPCT in Amps 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 2 2 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Metering functions Characteristics Metering Phase current 0 1 to 40 In 0 5 a Residual current Calculated 0 1 to 40 In 1 E Measured 0 1 to 20 Ino 41 E Demand current 0 1 to 40 In 0 5 Peak demand current 0 1 to 40 In 0 5 o Phase to phase voltage 0 06 to 1 2 Unp 0 5 u Phase to neutral voltage 0 06 to 1 2 Vnp 0 5 E Residual voltage 0 04 to 3 Vnp 1 Positive sequence voltage 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp 2 Negative sequence voltage 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp 2 Frequency 25 to 65 Hz 0 02 Hz u Active power 0 015 Sn to 999 MW 1 Reactive power 0 015 Sn to 999 Mvar 1 Apparent power 0 015 Sn to 999 MVA 1 Peak demand active power 0 015 Sn to 999 MW 41 O Peak demand reactive power 0 015 Sn to 999 Mvar 41 O Power factor 1 to 1 CAP IND 1 Calculated active energy 0 to 2 1 108 MW h 1 1 digit GO Calculated reactive energy 0 to 2 1 108 Mvar h 1 1 digit o Temperature 30 to 200 C 1 C from 20 to 140 C 7 or 22 to 392 F Network diagnosis assistance Tripping context GO Phase tripping current 0 1 to 40 In 5 GO Earth fault tripping current 0 1 to 20 Ino 5 GO Negative seguence unbalance 10 to 500 of Ib 2 Phase displacement 90 between VO and 10
109. 1 digit Accuracy 2 5 or 0 01 Ino Drop out pick up ratio Vs0 set point 93 5 5 with CSH sensor CT CSH30 or core balance CT ACE990 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 InO IsO x 100 sum of CTs Setting 2 Un to 80 Un Resolution 1 Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T operation time at 10 Is0 93 5 5 Setting definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 definite time 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 50 ms lt T1 lt 300 s IDMT 0 0 5s lt T1 lt 20s Characteristic times Operation time Pick up lt 40 ms at 2 IsO typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous um inst lt 50 ms at 2 Iso for IsO z 0 3 Ino typically 35 ms um inst lt 70 ms at 2 IsO for IsO lt 0 3 Ino typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms for T1 0 PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE51201 Protection functions Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Lim 1 Type 3 operation The protection function operates like an earth fault protection function with an added angular direction criterion Lim 1 Lim 2 It is adapted for distribution networks in which the neutral earthing system varies vo according to the operating mode The tripping direction may be set at the busbar end or
110. 10 150 0 5767 0 5370 0 5017 0 4700 0 3709 0 3017 0 2509 0 2124 0 1823 0 1584 0 1390 0 1230 0 1097 0 0984 0 0889 0 0806 0 0735 155 0 6031 0 5610 0 5236 0 4902 0 3860 0 3135 0 2604 0 2203 0 189 0 1641 0 1440 0 1274 0 1136 0 1019 0 0920 0 0834 0 0761 160 0 6302 0 5856 0 5461 0 5108 0 4013 0 3254 0 2701 0 2283 0 1957 0 1699 0 1490 0 1318 0 1174 0 1054 0 0951 0 0863 0 0786 165 0 6580 0 6108 0 5690 0 5319 0 4169 0 3375 0 2798 0 2363 0 2025 0 1757 0 1540 0 1362 0 1213 0 1088 0 0982 0 0891 0 0812 170 0 6866 0 6366 0 5925 0 5534 0 4327 0 3498 0 2897 0 2444 0 2094 0 1815 0 1591 0 1406 0 1253 0 1123 0 1013 0 0919 0 0838 175 0 7161 0 6631 0 6166 0 5754 0 4487 0 3621 0 2996 0 2526 0 2162 0 1874 0 1641 0 1451 0 1292 0 1158 0 1045 0 0947 0 0863 180 0 7464 0 6904 0 6413 0 5978 0 4651 0 3747 0 3096 0 2608 0 2231 0 1933 0 1693 0 1495 0 1331 0 1193 0 1076 0 0976 0 0889 185 0 7777 0 7184 0 6665 0 6208 0 4816 0 3874 0 3197 0 2691 0 2301 0 1993 0 1744 0 1540 0 1371 0 1229 0 1108 0 1004 0 0915 190 0 8100 0 7472 0 6925 0 6444 0 4985 0 4003 0 3300 0 2775 0 2371 0 2052 0 1796 0 1585 0 1411 0 1264 0 1140 0 1033 0 0941 195 0 8434 0 7769 0 7191 0 6685 0 5157 0 4133 0 3403 0 2860 0 2442 0 2113 0 1847 0 1631 0 1451 0 1300 0 1171 0 1062 0 0967 200 0 8780 0 8075 0 7465 0 6931 0 5331 0 4265 0 3508 0 2945 0 2513 0 2173 0 1900 0 1676 0 1491 0 1335 0 1203 0 1090 0 0993 3 22 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functi
111. 1006EN June 2005 MT10228 MT10551 Protection functions Operation The negative sequence unbalance protection function m picks up if the negative sequence component of phase currents is greater than the operation set point m it is time delayed The time delay may be definite time or IDMT according to a standardized curve or specially adapted Schneider curve The negative sequence current is determined according to the 3 phase currents gt 2n with a e 3 If Sepam is connected to 2 phase current sensors only the negative sequence current is 1 P 2 gt z x M1 a 13 J8 2m with a ze 3 Both formulas are eguivalent when there is no zero seguence current earth fault Definite time protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T 1 2 Fe li 3 1 a 12 a 13 is the protection operation time delay Definite time protection principle Standardized IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards IDMT protection principle The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and gt 20 li Is T is the operation time delay for 10 Is For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if li gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m if li gt 40 In tripping time is the time that correspon
112. 16 bit word in binary format absolute value unsigned The 0 bit b0 is the least significant bit in the word 16S format signed measurements temperatures The information is encoded in a 16 bit word as a complement of 2 Example m 0001 represents 1 m FFFF represents 1 32NS or 2 x 16NS format The information is encoded in two 16 bit words in binary format unsigned The first word is the most significant word 32S format The information is encoded as a complement of 2 in 2 words The first word is the most significant word m 0000 0001 represents 1 m FFFF FFFF represents 1 B format Rank i bit in the word with i between 0 and F Examples F E D Cc B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TS1 to Word address 0101 TS16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit address 101x TS49 to Word address 0104 TS64 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Bit address 104x TC1 to Word address 00F0 TC16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit address 1F0x STC1 to Word address 00F1 STC16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit address 0F1x 5 16 X format Sepam check word This format applies only to the Sepam check word that may be accessed at the word address 0100h This word contains various items of information relating to m Sepam operating mode m time tagging of events Each data item contained in the Sepam check word may be accessed bit by bit from address 1000 for bit 0 to 100F for bit 15
113. 19 Power supply kle E m to 2 5 mm screw type terminal block RS 485 m reversible phase and neutral ACE919CA m earthed via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case DE51670 RS 485 Phn V V L L ately LE se 3 7 9 5 6 36 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Use PCRED301006EN June 2005 Contents User Machine Interfaces SFT2841 setting and operating software Welcome window SFT2841 setting and operating software Presentation General screen organization Use of the software Configuration of a Sepam network UMI on front panel Presentation Advanced UMI Access to data White keys for current operation Blue keys for parameter and protection setting Data entry principles Default parameters all applications Principles and methods Testing and metering equipment required General examination and preliminary actions Checking of parameter and protection settings Checking of phase current and voltage input connection With 3 phase generator With single phase generator and voltages delivered by 3 VTs With single phase generator and voltages delivered by 2 VTs LPCT type current sensors Checking of residual voltage input connection Checking of residual current and residual voltage input connection Checking of logic input and output connection Validation of the complete protection chain Checking of optional module connection Test sheet Mai
114. 2 Is 3 4 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Setting ranges ANSI 67N 67NC type 1 Directional earth fault according to 10 projection Characteristic angle 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 IsO set point 0 1 to 15 Ino Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s Vs0 set point 2 to 80 of Un Memory time TOmem time 0 0 05 sto 300 s VOmem validity set point 0 2 to 80 of Unp ANSI 67N 67NC type 2 Directional earth fault according to I0 magnitude with half plan tripping zone Characteristic angle 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC VI El DT or IDMT IsO set point 0 5 to 15 Ino Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 5 to 1 Ino IDMT 0 1 sto 12 5 s at 10 IsO Vs0 set point 2 to 80 of Unp Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 sto 20s ANSI 67N 67NC type 3 Directional earth fault according to 10 magnitude with angular sector tripping zone Angle at start of tripping zone 0 to 359 Angle at end of tripping zone 0 to 359 IsO set point CSH core balance CT 0 1 Ato 30 A Definite time Inst 0 05 to 300 s 2 A rating 1 ACT CSH30 0 05 to 15 InO min 0 1 A sensitive In0 0 1 CT In Core
115. 230 V rms m 1 phasemeter if phase displacement V I is not identified on the voltage and current generator Computer equipment m PC with minimal configuration Microsoft Windows 98 NT 4 0 2000 XP 133 MHz Pentium processor 64 MB of RAM or 32 MB with Windows 98 64 MB free on hard disk CD ROM drive m SFT2841 software m CCA783 serial connection cord between the PC and Sepam Documents m complete connection diagram of Sepam and additional modules with phase current input connection to the corresponding CTs via the test terminal box residual current input connection phase voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box O residual voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box logic input and output connection temperature sensor connection analog output connection m hardware BOMs and installation rules m group of Sepam parameter and protection settings available in paper format 8 EDITH 7 21 Commissioning 7 22 General examination and preliminary actions Checking to be done prior to energizing Apart from the mechanical state of the equipment use the diagrams and BOMs provided by the contractor to check m identification of Sepam and accessories determined by the contractor m correct earthing of Sepam via terminal 17 of the 20 pin connector m correct connection of auxiliar
116. 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 35 6 1 Installation Precautions We recommend that you follow the instructions given in this document for quick correct installation of your Sepam m equipment identification m assembly m connection of current and voltage inputs probes m connection of power supply m checking prior to commissioning Handling transport and storage Sepam in its original packaging Transport Sepam may be shipped to any destination without talking any additional precautions by all usual means of transport Handling Sepam may be handled without any particular care and can even withstand being dropped by a person handling it person standing on floor Storage Sepam may be stored in its original packaging in an appropriate location for several years m temperature between 25 C and 70 C m humidity lt 90 Periodic yearly checking of the environment and the packaging condition is recommended Once Sepam has been unpacked it should be energized as soon as possible Sepam installed in a cubicle Transport Sepam may be transported by all usual means of transport in the customary conditions used for cubicles Storage conditions should be taken into consideration for a long period of transport Handling Should the Sepam fall out of a cubicle check its condition by visual inspection and energizing Storage Keep the cubicle protection packing for as long as
117. 3 0 4953 0 4578 0 4247 0 3953 0 3691 105 3 0445 2 0232 1 5796 1 3063 1 1147 0 9710 0 8583 0 7673 0 6920 0 6286 0 5746 0 5279 0 4872 0 4515 0 4199 0 3917 110 2 3979 1 7824 1 4435 1 2174 1 0524 0 9252 0 8238 0 7406 0 6712 06122 0 5616 0 5176 0 4790 0 4450 0 4148 115 3 0040 2 0369 1 6025 1 3318 1 1409 0 9970 0 8837 0 7918 0 7156 0 6514 0 5964 0 5489 0 5074 0 4708 0 4384 120 2 3792 1 7918 1 4610 1 2381 1 0742 0 9474 0 8457 0 7621 0 6921 0 6325 0 5812 05365 0 4973 0 4626 125 2 9037 2 0254 1 6094 1 3457 1 1580 1 0154 0 9027 0 8109 0 7346 0 6700 0 6146 0 5666 0 5245 0 4874 130 2 3308 1 7838 1 4663 1 2493 1 0885 0 9632 0 8622 0 7789 0 7089 0 6491 0 5975 0 5525 0 5129 135 2 7726 1 9951 1 6035 1 3499 1 1672 1 0275 0 9163 0 8253 0 7494 0 6849 0 6295 0 5813 0 5390 140 22634 1 7626 1 4618 1 2528 1 0962 0 9734 0 8740 0 7916 0 7220 0 6625 0 6109 0 5658 145 2 6311 1 9518 1 5877 1 3463 1 1701 1 0341 0 9252 0 8356 0 7606 0 6966 0 6414 0 5934 150 3 2189 2 1855 1 7319 1 4495 1 2498 1 0986 0 9791 0 8817 0 8007 0 7320 0 6729 0 6217 155 2 4908 1 9003 1 5645 1 3364 1 1676 1 0361 0 9301 0 8424 0 7686 0 7055 0 6508 160 2 9327 2 1030 1 6946 1 4313 1 2417 1 0965 0 9808 0 8860 0 8066 0 7391 0 6809 165 2 3576 1 8441 1 5361 1 3218 1 1609 1 0343 0 9316 0 8461 0 7739 0 7118 170 2 6999 2 0200 1 6532 1 4088 1 2296 1 0908 0 9793 0 8873 0 8099 0 7438 175 3 2244 2 2336 1 7858 1 5041 1 3036 1 1507 1 0294 0 9302 0 8473 0 7768 180 2 5055 1 9388 1 6094 1 3832 1 2144 1 0822 0 9751 0 8861 0 8109 185 2
118. 3 4 16NS mn thermal rate 1 Learnt cooling time constant T2 49 RMS 0185 R 3 4 16NS mn thermal rate 2 Phase displacement zone Phase displacement Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Phase displacement 02 01A0 01A1 L 3 4 32NS 1 Phase displacement 0 01A2 01A3 L 3 4 32NS 1 Phase displacement 1 01A4 01A5 L 3 4 32NS A Phase displacement 92 01A6 01A7 L 3 4 32NS 1 Phase displacement 93 01A8 01A9 L 3 4 32NS 1 Tripping context zone Latest tripping context Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit Modbus enabled Time tagging of the context see time 0250 0253 R 3 IEC tagging of events chapter Tripping current Itrip1 0254 R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Tripping current Itrip2 0256 R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Tripping current Itrip3 0258 R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Residual current I0 Sum 025A R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Residual current I0 measured 025C R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Phase to phase voltage U21 025E R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to phase voltage U32 0260 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to phase voltage U13 0262 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V1 0264 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V2 0266 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V3 0268 R 3 4 32NS 1V Residual voltage VO 026A R 3 4 32NS 1V Positive sequence voltage Vd 026C R 3 4 32NS 1V Negative sequence voltage Vi 026E R 3 4 32NS 1V Frequency 0270 R 3 4 32NS 0 01 Hz Active power P 0272 R 3 4 32S 1 kW Reactive power Q 0274 R 3 4 32S 1 kvar PCRED301006EN June 2005 5 13 Modbus communication Data addresses
119. 40 2 Except for communication 3 kV in common mode and 1kV in differential mode 3 Except for communication 1 kVrms 4 Sepam must be stored in its original packing PCRED301006EN June 2005 1 5 1 6 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Metering functions Contents General settings 2 2 Characteristics 2 3 Phase current Residual current 2 4 Average current and peak demand currents 2 5 Phase to phase voltage Phase to neutral voltage 2 6 Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage 2 7 Negative sequence voltage Frequency 2 8 Active reactive and apparent power 2 9 Peak demand active and reactive power Power factor cos 2 10 Active and reactive energy 2 11 Temperature 2 12 Tripping context Tripping current 2 13 Negative sequence unbalance 2 14 Phase displacement 90 Phase displacement 01 02 03 2 15 Disturbance recording 2 16 Thermal capacity used Cooling time constant 2 17 Operating time before tripping Waiting time after tripping 2 18 Running hours counter and operating time Starting current and starting overload time 2 19 Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time delay 2 20 Cumulative breaking current and number of operations 2 21 Operating time Charging time 2 22 VT supervision 2 23 CT supervision 2 25 PCRED301006EN June 2005 HA Merlin Gerin 2 1 Metering functions General settings The general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connect
120. 5 Installation ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters Description and dimensions A Terminal block for 2 wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS 485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block DE52172 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn ON OFF LED on if ACE919 is energized SW1 parameter setting of 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors guerun oenn ACE 91904 kon Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q ON Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q ON 2 wire RS 485 network impedance ON matching by 150 Q resistor DE50038 Converter configuration when delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated Male 9 pin sub D connector supplied with the ACE919 Co nn ecti on 2 wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply m to 2 5 mm screw type terminal block m L L 2 wire RS 485 signals m Shielding 2 wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply m to female 9 pin sub D connector m 2 wire RS 485 signals L L m distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0 V ACE9
121. 5 0 784 0 514 0 290 0 214 0 967 0 805 0 796 0 503 0 860 0 790 0 489 19 0 0 777 0 500 0 275 0 200 0 966 0 798 0 792 0 492 0 855 0 784 0 475 19 5 0 770 0 486 0 261 0 188 0 965 0 792 0 788 0 482 0 851 0 778 0 463 20 0 0 763 0 474 0 248 0 176 0 964 0 786 0 784 0 473 0 848 0 772 0 450 1 Values only suitable for IEC A B and C curves PCRED301006EN June 2005 HA Merlin Gerin 3 55 MT10539 MT10528 Protection functions Standard inverse time SIT curve Very inverse time VIT or LTI curve General IDMT protection functions Extremely inverse time EIT curve Ultra inverse time UIT curve t9A t s A 100 01 1 000 00 i E i v v 1 v V v v v v v V v 100 00 v v v v V v v v v 10 00 4 KU v v T v v V v curve T 1s N V pa curve T 1s 7 a s ia ma 10 005 v v a X PR gt
122. 55 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 3 40 Directional phase ANSI code 67 m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves gt Is time delayed output MT10527 gt Is pick up signal value of internal time delay counter overcurrent Pom Characteristics Characteristic angle 0 Setting 30 45 60 Accuracy 2 Tripping direction Setting Busbar line Tripping logic Setting One out of three two out of three Tripping curve Setting Definite time IDMT chosen according to list page 3 39 Is set point Setting Definite time 0 1 In lt Is lt 24 In expressed in Amps IDMT 0 1 In lt Is lt 2 4 In expressed in Amps Resolution 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 5 or 0 01 In Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T operation time at 10 Is 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 In Is x 100 Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or
123. 556 Protection functions Recloser ANSI code 79 Example 1 fault cleared after the second cycle Earth fault 50N 51N unit 1 instantaneous 50N 51N unit 1 T 500 ms Circuit breaker open Recloser ready Remote indication Reclosing in progress Remote indication Reclosing successful 50N 51N unit 1 instantaneous 50N 51N unit 1 T 500 ms Circuit breaker open Recloser ready Remote indication Reclosing in progress Remote indication final trip 3 50 i l I 4 iii ag bial fault message Cycle 1 earth fault message V Earth fault lt _____ l1 Protection time delay l Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 Reclaim time S z i Sf gt LI Sf Lo gt t Example 2 fault not cleared Earth fault Cleared fault message Cycle 1 earth fault message Cycle 2 earth fault Earth fault message Earth fault 4 la gt la 1 Protection time delay l Protection l l time delay Final trip Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 message 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Recloser ANSI code 79 Example 3 closing on a fault l Z 50N 51N unit 1 l E instantaneous l l l Protection time delay 50N 51N unit 1 oS T 500 ms Earth fault 4 Circuit breaker Final tripping open V hd o ra me message Recloser re
124. 7 0 0139 0 0124 0 0111 0 0101 0 0064 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 105 0 0466 0 0429 0 0353 0 0296 0 0252 0 0217 0 0188 0 0165 0 0146 0 0130 0 0117 0 0106 0 0067 0 0047 0 0034 0 0026 110 0 0489 0 0450 0 0370 0 0310 0 0264 0 0227 0 0197 0 0173 0 0153 0 0137 0 0123 0 0111 0 0071 0 0049 0 0036 0 0028 115 0 0512 0 0471 0 0388 0 0325 0 0276 0 0237 0 0207 0 0181 0 0160 0 0143 0 0128 0 0116 0 0074 0 0051 0 0038 0 0029 120 00535 0 0492 0 0405 0 0339 0 0288 0 0248 0 0216 0 0189 0 0167 0 0149 0 0134 0 0121 0 0077 0 0053 0 0039 0 0030 125 0 0558 0 0513 0 0422 0 0353 0 0300 0 0258 0 0225 0 0197 0 0175 0 0156 0 0139 0 0126 0 0080 0 0056 0 0041 0 0031 130 0 0581 0 0534 0 0439 0 0368 0 0313 0 0269 0 0234 0 0205 0 0182 0 0162 0 0145 0 0131 0 0084 0 0058 0 0043 0 0033 135 0 0604 0 0555 0 0457 0 0382 0 0325 0 0279 0 0243 0 0213 0 0189 0 0168 0 0151 0 0136 0 0087 0 0060 0 0044 0 0034 140 00627 0 0576 0 0474 0 0397 0 0337 0 0290 0 0252 0 0221 0 0196 0 0174 0 0156 0 0141 0 0090 0 0062 0 0046 0 0035 145 0 0650 0 0598 0 0491 0 0411 0 0349 0 0300 0 0261 0 0229 0 0203 0 0181 0 0162 0 0146 0 0093 0 0065 0 0047 0 0036 150 0 0673 0 0619 0 0509 0 0426 0 0361 0 0311 0 0270 0 0237 0 0210 0 0187 0 0168 0 0151 0 0096 0 0067 0 0049 0 0038 155 0 0696 0 0640 0 0526 0 0440 0 0374 0 0321 0 0279 0 0245 0 0217 0 0193 0 0173 0 0156 0 0100 0 0069 0 0051 0 0039 160 0 0720 0 0661 0 0543 0 0455 0 0386 0 0332 0 0289 0 0253 0 0224 0 0200 0 0179 0 0161 0 0103 0 0071 0 0052 0 0040 165 0 0743 0 0683 0 0561 0 0469 0 0398
125. 7D 32P 32Q 0 none 1 inhibition 47 51V 59 59N functions 10 Behavior on 67 function 0 non directional 1 inhibition 11 Behavior on 67N function 0 non directional 1 inhibition 12 Vi set point Vn 13 li set point In 14 Time delay loss 3 V 2 U 10 ms 15 Time delay Vi li 10 ms 16 Reserved 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication Presentation The disturbance recording function is used to record analog and logical signals during a time interval Sepam series 40 can store up to 19 records Each record comprises two files m configuration file with suffix CFG m data file with suffix DAT The data of each record may be transferred via the Modbus link It is possible to transfer 1 to 19 records to a remote monitoring and control system A record may be transferred as many times as possible until it is overwritten by a new record If a record is made by Sepam while the oldest record is being transferred the oldest record is stopped If a command e g remote read or remote setting request is carried out during the transfer of a disturbance recording record the record in not disturbed Time setting Each record can be dated Time setting of Sepam is described in the Time tagging of events section Transferring records Transfer requests are made record by record A configuration file and a data file are produced for each record The master sends the comman
126. 8802 2 1195 1 7272 1 4698 1 2825 1 1379 1 0220 0 9265 0 8463 190 3 4864 2 3401 1 8608 1 5647 1 3555 1 1970 1 0713 0 9687 0 8829 195 2 6237 2 0149 1 6695 1 4343 1 2597 1 1231 1 0126 0 9209 200 3 0210 2 1972 1 7866 15198 1 3266 1 1778 1 0586 0 9605 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 21 Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples Cold curves for Es0 0 V ib 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4 60 Es 50 0 1579 0 1491 0 1410 0 1335 0 1090 0 0908 0 0768 0 0659 0 0572 0 0501 0 0442 0 0393 0 0352 0 0317 0 0288 0 0262 0 0239 55 0 1752 0 1653 0 1562 0 1479 0 1206 0 1004 0 0849 0 0727 0 0631 0 0552 0 0487 0 0434 0 0388 0 0350 0 0317 0 0288 0 0263 60 0 1927 0 1818 0 1717 0 1625 0 1324 0 1100 0 0929 0 0796 0 069 0 0604 0 0533 0 0474 0 0424 0 0382 0 0346 0 0315 0 0288 65 0 2106 0 1985 0 1875 0 1773 0 1442 0 1197 0 1011 0 0865 0 075 0 0656 0 0579 0 0515 0 0461 0 0415 0 0375 0 0342 0 0312 70 0 2288 0 2156 0 20385 0 1924 0 1562 0 1296 0 1093 0 0935 0 081 0 0708 0 0625 0 0555 0 0497 0 0447 0 0405 0 0368 0 0336 75 0 2474 0 2329 0 2197 0 2076 0 1684 0 1395 0 1176 0 1006 0 087 0 0761 0 0671 0 0596 0 0533 0 0480 0 0434 0 0395 0 0361 80 0 2662 0 2505 0 2362 0 2231 0 1807 0 1495 0 1260 0 1076 0 0931 0 0813 0 0717 0 0637 0 0570 0 0513 0 0464 0 0422 0 0385 85 0 2855 0 2685 0 2530 0 2389 0 1931 0 1597 0 1344 0 1148 0 0992 0 0867 0 0764 0 0678 0 0607 0 0546 0 0494
127. AC At state 0 lt 6VDC lt 75 V DC s22VAC lt 137 V DC lt 48 V AC Control relay outputs O1 O2 011 contacts Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking capacity Resistive load 8 4A 0 7A 0 3A L R load lt 20 ms 6 2A 0 5A 0 2A L R load lt 40 ms 4 1A 0 2A 0 1A Resistive load 8A p f load gt 0 3 5A Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Annunciation relay output 03 04 012 013 014 contacts Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking capacity L R load lt 20 ms 2 1A 0 5A 0 15A p f load gt 0 3 1A Power supply Z oeoEoEoEoEowowoo o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Lo Voltage 24 250 V DC 110 240 V AC Range 20 10 20 10 47 5 to 63 Hz Deactivated consumption 1 lt 6W lt 6VA Maximum consumption lt 11W lt 25VA Inrush current lt 28 A for 100 us lt 28 A for 100 us Acceptable momentary outages 20 ms Current 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA Load impedance lt 600 wiring included Accuracy 0 50 1 According to configuration 2 Relay outputs comply with clause 6 7 of standard C37 90 30 A 200 ms 2000 operations 1 4 8 DE PCRED301006EN June 2005 Sepam series 40 Environmental characteristics Emission tests
128. Circuit breaker contactor control function with latching of all tripping conditions protection function outputs and logic inputs With this function Sepam performs the following m grouping of all tripping conditions and breaking device control m latching of the tripping order with inhibition of closing until the cause of tripping disappears and is acknowledged by the user see Latching acknowledgment m indication of the cause of tripping o locally by signal lamps Trip and others and by messages on the display o remotely by remote indications 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE50464 Control and monitoring functions Start per hour 66 Inhibit restart 49 RMS Protection functions configured for breaker controlled tripping 27 27D 32P 32Q 37 38 49T 46 47 51 51N 51V 48 51LR 49 RMS 59 59N 67 67N 81L H Buchholz tripping Pressure tripping Thermostat tripping Thermistor tripping External tripping 1 External tripping 2 External tripping 3 SSL tripping logic discrimination Open order sent by recloser V_TRIPCB logic equations TC 2 remote closer order inhibit remote control Close order sent by recloser V CLOSECB logic equations Manual closing logic input Block diagram SF6 pressure T 0 drop Inhibit closing logic input V_INHIBCLOSE logic equations end of charging position circuit
129. Disturbing field emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 A Conducted disturbance emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 B Immunity tests Radiated disturbances Immunity to radiated fields IEC 60255 22 3 10 V m 80 MHz 1 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 1 ll 10 V m 80 MHz 2 GHz ANSI C37 90 2 1 35 V m 25 MHz 1 GHz Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255 22 2 8 kV air 6 kV contact ANSI C37 90 3 1 8 kV air 4 KV contact Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency IEC 61000 4 8 IV 30 A m continuous 300 A m 13 s Immunity tests Conducted disturbances Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 60255 22 6 10 V Fast transient bursts IEC 60255 22 4 AorB 4 kV 2 5 kHz 2 kV 5 kHz IEC 61000 4 4 IV 4 kV 2 5 kHz ANSI C37 90 1 4 kV 2 5 kHz 1 MHz damped oscillating wave IEC 60255 22 1 2 5 kV MC 1 kV MD ANSI C37 90 1 1 2 5 kV MC and MD 100 kHz damped oscillating wave IEC 61000 4 12 2 5 kV MC 1 kV MD Surges IEC 61000 4 5 2kV MC 1 kV MD Voltage interruptions IEC 60255 11 Series 20 100 10 ms Series 40 100 20 ms In operation Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 1 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Fe 2Hz 13 2Hz a 1mm Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 2 10 Gn 11 ms Earthquakes IEC 60255 21 3 2 2 Gn horizontal axes 1 Gn vertical axes De energized Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 2 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 2 27 Gn 11 ms Jolts IEC 60255 21 2 2 20 Gn 16 ms In operation
130. E M M 8 Protection 50N 51N unit 4 E E E E E NM M 9 Protection 49 RMS alarm set point E E m m 10 Protection 49 RMS tripping set point E E mnm m 11 Protection 37 u 12 Protection 46 unit 1 E E E E E M M 13 Protection 46 unit 2 E E E E E NM M 14 Protection 48 51LR 14 locked rotor L 15 Protection 48 51LR 14 rotor locking on start 16 Protection 48 51LR 14 excessive starting time Address word 0102 TS17 to TS32 Bit address 1020 to 102F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 17 Protection 27D unit 1 18 Protection 27D unit 2 19 Protection 27 27S unit 1 E E E E E M M 20 Protection 27 27S unit 2 E E E E E M M 21 Protection 27R 22 Protection 59 unit 1 E E E E E M M 23 Protection 59 unit 2 E E E E E M M 24 Protection 59N unit 1 E E E E E M M 25 Protection 59N unit 2 E E E E E NM M 26 Protection 81H unit 1 E E E E E NM M 27 Protection 81H unit 2 E E E E E M M 28 Protection 81L unit 1 E E E E E NM M 29 Protection 81L unit 2 E E E E E NM M 30 Protection 81L unit 3 E E E E E NM M 31 Protection 81L unit 4 E E E E E NM M 32 Protection 66 u Address word 0103 TS33 to TS48 Bit address 1030 to 103F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 33 Protection 67 unit 1 34 Protection 67 unit 2 O 35 Protection 67N unit 1 im im 36 Protection 67N unit 2 im im 37 Protection 47 E E E E NM NM M 38 Protection 32P E im E im 39 Protec
131. Electrical network protection Sepam series 40 User s manual June 2005 a brand of Electric Contents Sepam series 40 Metering functions Protection functions Control and monitoring functions Modbus communication Installation Use PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Sepam series 40 Contents Presentation 1 2 Selection table 1 3 Electrical characteristics 1 4 Environmental characteristics 1 5 PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 1 1 PE50297 PE50298 PE50299 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 40 a modular solution Sepam series 40 with basic UMI and with fixed advanced UMI NF ere Example of an SFT2841 software screen 1 2 ark nee wee Dein BS MA Presentation The Sepam series 40 family of protection and metering units is designed for the operation of machines and electrical distribution networks of industrial installations and utility substations for all levels of voltage The Sepam series 40 family consists of simple high performing solutions suited to demanding applications that call for current and voltage metering Sepam series 40 selection guide by application Selection criteria Measurements land U land U land U Specific protection functions Directional earth fault Directional earth fault and phase overcurrent Applications Substation S40 S41 42 Transformer T40 T42 Motor M41 Generator G40
132. Free Close order u u u u E Free Phase voltage transformer fuse melting a E a a a Free Residual voltage transformer fuse melting a a E a a Free External positive active energy counter a a a a a Free External negative active energy counter a a a a a Free External positive reactive energy counter a a a a a Free External negative reactive energy counter a a a a a Free Logic outputs Tripping E a C a a O1 Inhibit closing i a E a E 02 Watchdog u a a Hi E 04 Close order a a a a E O11 Note all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 matrix for other non predefined applications 4 4 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Control and monitoring Standard logic input assignment functions The table below lists the logic input assignment obtained with the SFT2841 software by clicking on the Standard assignment button Logic inputs Open position u E u 111 Closed position u L u u 12 Logic discrimination blocking reception 1 u E 113 Logic discrimination blocking reception 2 E 121 Switching of groups of settings A B u 113 External reset u E u 114 External tripping 1 u L 121 External tripping 2 L 122 External tripping 3 u E u L 123 Buchholz gas tripping 121 Thermostat tripping E 122 Buchholz gas alarm I23 Thermostat alarm 124 Inhibit remote control u L u u E 125 SF6 E
133. I26 PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 4 5 Control and monitoring functions 4 6 Circuit breaker contactor control ANSI code 94 69 Description Sepam is used to control breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils m circuit breakers with shunt trip or undervoltage trip units parameter setting of O1 in the front of the advanced UMI or using SFT2841 m latching contactors with shunt trip units Integrated circuit breaker contactor control This function controls the breaking device It is coordinated with the recloser and logic discrimination functions and includes the anti pumping function It performs the following operations according to the parameter setting m tripping on output O1 by o protection unit units configured to trip the circuit breaker logic discrimination remote control via the communication link external protection open order by logic input closing on output O11 by recloser remote control via the communication link remote control may be inhibited by the inhibit remote control logic input o closing control by logic input m inhibition of closing on output O2 by o trip circuit fault TCS o SF6 fault o inhibit order by logic input OONMOCGOG Circuit breaker contactor control with lockout function ANSI 86 The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout relays may be carried out by Sepam using the predefined
134. IDMT according to the curves opposite Confirmation The phase overcurrent protection function includes a paramerizable confirmation component The output is confirmed as follows m by phase to phase undervoltage protection unit 1 m by negative sequence overvoltage protection m no confirmation Definite time protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay MT10911 Definite time protection principle IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards 7 type 1 DE50684 IDMT protection principle 3 26 Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50 51 The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Is The tripping time for I Is values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions Ja aP aJ a a a a a
135. June 2005 ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter Function The ACE909 2 converter is used to connect a master central computer eguipped with a V24 RS 232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS 485 network Without reguiring any flow control signals after the parameters are set the ACE909 2 converter performs conversion network polarization and automatic dispatching of frames between the master and the stations by two way simplex half duplex single pair transmission The ACE909 2 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949 2 ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and master communication settings Characteristics Weight Assembly 0 280 kg On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail Power supply Galvanic isolation between power supply and frame and between power supply and interface supply Galvanic isolation between RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces Protection by time delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 110 to 220 V AC 10 47 to 63 Hz 2000 Vrms 50 Hz 1 min 1000 VRms 50 Hz 1 min 1 A rating Data format Transmission delay distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with distributed supply 11 bits 1 start 8 bits 1 parity 1 stop lt 100 ns 12 V DC or 24 V DC 12 Operating temp
136. Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Setting ranges ANSI 27 Phase to phase undervoltage 5 to 100 of Unp 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 27D 47 Positive seguence undervoltage 15 to 60 of Unp 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 27R Remanent undervoltage 5 to 100 of Unp 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 27S Phase to neutral undervoltage 5 to 100 of Vnp 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 32P Directional active overpower 1 to 120 of Sn 0 1 s to 300 s ANSI 320 40 Directional reactive overpower 5 to 120 of Sn 2 0 1 s to 300 s ANSI 37 Phase undercurrent 0 15 to 1 Ib 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 38 49T Temperature monitoring 8 or 16 RTDs Alarm and trip set points 0 to 180 C or 32 to 356 F ANSI 46 Negative sequence unbalance Definite time 0 1 to 5 Ib 0 1 sto 300 s IDMT 0 1 to 0 5 Ib Schneider Electric 0 1 to 1 Ib CEI IEEE 0 1sto1s Tripping curve Schneider Electric CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C IEEE MI D VI E El F ANSI 47 Negative seguence overvoltage 1 to 50 of Unp 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 48 51LR 14 Excessive starting time locked rotor 0 5 Ib to 5 Ib ST starting time 0 5 s to 300 s LT and LTS time delays 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 49RMS Thermal overload Rate 1 Rate 2 Accounting for negative seguence component 0 2 25 45 9 Time constant Heating T1 5 to 120 mn T1 5 to 120 mn Cooling T2 5 to 600 mn T2 5 to 600 mn Alarm and tripping set points 50
137. OSE V CLOSECB V TRIPCB V10 v9 Address word 010D logic output status bit address 10D0 to 10DF Bit F E D Cc B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Output z z 014 013 012 O11 04 03 02 O1 Address word 010E LED status bit address 10E0 a 10EF Bit F E D Cc B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LED s LD L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 LD red LED indicating Sepam unavailable 5 10 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Measurement zone x 1 Measurements x 1 Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Phase current 11 x 1 0113 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Phase current 12 x 1 0114 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Phase current 13 x 1 0115 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Residual current 10 Sum x 1 0116 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Residual current measured x 1 0117 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Average phase current Im1 x 1 0118 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Average phase current Im2 x 1 0119 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Average phase current Im3 x 1 011A R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Peak demand phase current IM1 x 1 011B R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Peak demand phase current IM2 x 1 011C R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Peak demand phase current IM3 x 1 011D R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Phase to phase voltage U21 x 1 011E R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to phase voltage U32 x 1 011F R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to phase voltage U13
138. PT2 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication Link activity LED The ACE interface link activity LEDs are activated by variations in the signal on the Modbus network When the supervisor communicates with Sepam during transmission or reception these LEDs flash After wiring check the information given by the link activity LEDs when the supervisor operates Note Flashing indicates that there is traffic passing to or from Sepam it does not mean that the exchanges are valid Functional test If there is any doubt about correct operation of the link m run read write cycles in the test zone m use Modbus diagnosis function 8 sub code 0 echo mode The Modbus frames below transmitted or received by a supervisor are an example of a test performed when communication is set up Test zone Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0002 C75B Reception 01 03 04 0000 0000 FA33 Write Transmission 01 10 0C00 0001 02 1234 6727 Reception 01 10 0C00 0001 0299 Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0001 875A Reception 01 03 02 1234 B533 Function 8 Modbus diagnosis echo mode Transmission 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C Reception 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C Even in echo mode Sepam recalculates and checks the CRC sent by the master m if the CRC received is valid Sepam replies m if the CRC received is invalid Sepam does not reply PCRED301006EN June 2005 Commissioning and diagnosis Modbus diagnosis counters
139. Running and stopping of the equipment are calculated from the value of the current m running if gt 0 1 Ib m stopped if lt 0 1 Ib Two time constants may be set m T1 heat rise time constant concerns equipment that is running m T2 cooling time constant concerns equipment that is stopped Accounting for harmonics The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3 phase current which takes into account harmonics up to number 17 Accounting for ambient temperature Most machines are designed to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 40 C The thermal overload function takes into account the ambient temperature Sepam equipped with the temperature sensor option to increase the calculated heat rise value when the temperature measured exceeds 40 C Tmax 40 C Tmax Tambient in which T max is the eguipment s maximum temperature according to insulation class T ambient is the measured temperature Adaptation of the protection to motor thermal withstand Motor thermal protection is often set based on the hot and cold curves supplied by the machine manufacturer To fully comply with these experimental curves additional parameters must be set m initial heat rise EsO is used to reduce the cold tripping time Increase factor faz 2 Ta Eso modified cold curve t EM BE o legy re Es m a second group of parameters time constants and set points is used to take into account thermal withsta
140. S 485 differential External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode Number of Sepam units Maximum length with 12 V DC power supply Maximum length with 24 V DC power supply 5 320 m 1000 m 10 180 m 750 m 20 160 m 450 m 25 125 m 375 m Description and dimensions a and CE Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 plug to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply 12 V DC or 24 V DC 4 Grounding earthing terminal 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Jumper for RS 485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Re 150 Q to be set to m PC if the module is not at one end of the RS 485 network default position m Rc if the module is at one end of the RS 485 network 3 Network cable clamps inner diameter of clamp 6 mm Connection m connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m connection of earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross section gt 6 mm or cable with cross section z 2 5 mm and length lt 200 mm equipped with a 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm m the interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable o the network ca
141. S multiplying factor The time delay of IDMT tripping curves except for RI curve may be set m cither by T sec operation time at 10 x Is m or by TMS factor that corresponds to in the equations above B Example th 25 TMS with TMS 5 Ti The IEC curve of the VIT type is positioned so as to be the same with TMS 1 or T 1 5 sec Timer hold delay T1 m definite time enables the function to be activated with intermittent faults m IDMT makes it possible to emulate an electromagnetic disk protection relay t0 x with 5 TMS 1 4 B Is T1 timer hold delay setting timer hold delay for reset 0 and TMS 1 T tripping time delay setting at 10 Is B basic tripping curve value at 10Is 10 1 The standardized or estimated values of T1 are available in the SFT2841 software help 8 DEL 3 57 3 58 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Control and monitoring functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Contents Description Definition of symbols Logic input output assignment Circuit breaker contactor control ANSI code 94 69 Logic discrimination ANSI code 68 Radial network Closed ring network Substation with 2 parallel incomers Disturbance recording triggering Switching of groups of settings Local indication ANSI code 30 Control matrix Logic equations 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 6 4 9 4 9 4 11 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 18 4 19 4 1 DE50794 Control and monitorin
142. Set x is set to 1 when y is equal to 1 x is set to 0 when z is equal to 1 and y is equal to 0 x is unchanged in the other cases m LATCH x y latching of variables x y The variables are maintained constantly at 1 after having been set to 1 a first time They are reset to 0 after Sepam is recharging ti key external input or remote control order The LATCH function accepts as many parameters as the number of variables that the user wishes to latch It applies to the entire program whatever the position in the program For easier reading it is advisable to put it at the start of the program 8 Merin Gerin 4 19 MT11042 Control and monitoring Logic equations functions m x TON y t on delay timer JOUUUHU o The x variable follows the switching to 1 of the y variable with a delay t t in ms m x TOF y t off delay timer 4 t The x variable follows the switching to 0 of the y variable with a delay t t in ms XITOF yi m x PULSE 4 i n time tagger Used to generate n periodic pulses separated by a time interval i as of the starting time d o dis expressed as hour minute second o iis expressed as hour minute second o nis an integer n 1 repetition until the end of the day Example V1 PULSE 8 30 00 1 0 0 4 will generate 4 pulses at one hour intervals at 8 h 30 9 h 30 10 h 30 11 h 30 This will be repeated every 24 hours The pulses last for a 14 ms cycle V1 has
143. TMS 2 Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 1 Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 6 0 5 to 20 s Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 75 ms to 2 Is typically 65 ms inst lt 90 ms to 2 Is confirmed instantaneous typically 75 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1 0 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions MN characteristic angle 604 0 x DE50454 tripping zone Tripping characteristic of protection function 67N type 1 00 x 0 60 0 DE50455 characteristic angle sector vo IsO set point tripping zone Tripping characteristic of protection function 67N type 1 00 0 V1 V2 5 S V3 external VT 50456 vo CSH bal CT lo 10 cos p0 60 lt Is0 CT CSH30 0 10 cos 0 00 gt IsO core ACE990 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Description This function comprises 2 groups of settings with 2 units for each group The mode of switching groups of settings may be determined by parameter setting m by input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B m by remote control TC3 TC4 m operation with a single group group A or group B To adapt to all cases of applications and all earthing
144. The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m if gt 40 In tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In In current transformer rated current defined when the general settings are made Block diagram pick up signal and logic discrimination DE50508 N time delayed output Confirmation optional Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is time delayed output i l gt Is pick up signal l l l l MT10541 tripping l l l L value of internal l l l l l l l Lss time delay l l l l I l PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50 51 m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves gt Is time delayed output MT10527 gt Is pick up signal La 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE
145. a time message frame via the communication network Slave number 0 is used for broadcasting m external synchronization mode via a logic input The synchronization mode is selected at the time of commissioning via SFT2841 Internal synchronization via the network mode The time message frame is used for both time setting and synchronization of Sepam In this case it must be sent regularly at brief intervals between 10 and 60 seconds in order for synchronous time to be obtained Sepam s internal clock is reset each time a new time frame is received and synchronization is maintained if the difference in synchronism is less than 100 milliseconds With internal synchronization via the network accuracy is linked to the master and its mastery of time frame transmission in the communication network Sepam is synchronized without delay at the end of the receipt of the frame Time changes are made by sending a frame to Sepam with the new date and time Sepam then switches into a transitional non synchronous status When Sepam is in synchronous status if no time message is received for 200 seconds the appearance of the not synchronous event is triggered 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE50468 Modbus communication master computer clock JL synchronization link network Sepam Architecture for external sync
146. a new reclosing cycle is initiated Safety time until recloser ready After manual closing of the circuit breaker the recloser function is inhibited during this time If a fault occurs during this time no reclosing cycles are initiated and the circuit breaker remains permanently open Dead time The cycle n dead time delay is activated by the circuit breaker tripping order given by the recloser in cycle n The breaking device remains open throughout the time delay At the end of the cycle n dead time delay the n 1 cycle begins and the recloser orders the closing of the circuit breaker Operation Initialization of the recloser The recloser is ready to operate if all of the following conditions are met m CB control function activated and recloser in service m circuit breaker closed m safety time until 79 ready elapsed m none of the recloser inhibition conditions is true see further on The recloser ready information may be viewed with the control matrix PCRED301006EN June 2005 Recloser ANSI code 79 Recloser cycles m case of a cleared fault following a reclosing order if the fault does not appear after the reclaim time has run out the recloser reinitializes and a message appears on the display see example 1 m case of a fault that is not cleared following instantaneous or time delayed tripping by the protection unit activation of the dead time associated with the first active cycle At the end of th
147. ady Remote indication final tripping Example 4 no extension of dead time Earth fault TRIP V na Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 Greiti fo A open of Recharging time A 7 MT10558 lt gt Circuit breaker charged Example 5 extension of dead time Earth fault 4 TRIP J m Maximum additional dead time Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 ra gt MT10564 Circuit breaker gt open p i Circ it breaker t i Normal recharging time na charged PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 3 51 Protection functions 3 52 Overfrequency ANSI code 81H Operation The protection function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is above the Fs set point and the positive sequence voltage is above the Vs set point If a single VT is connected U21 the function picks up when the frequency is above the Fs set point and the U21 voltage is above the Vs set point It includes a definite time delay T Block diagram u32 E 1 Vd 21 v3 Vd gt Vs 1 Or U21 gt Vs if only one VT r s T 0 time delayed output amp pick up signal Characteristics Fs set point Setting 50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz Accuracy 0 02 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Pick up drop out difference 0 25 Hz 0 1 Hz Vs set point Setting 20 Unp to 50 Unp Accuracy 2 Resolution 1 Time delay T Set
148. aha To el mt 152 gt Green LED Sepam on Red LED steadily on module unavailable flashing Sepam link unavailable 9 yellow indication LEDs Label identifying the indication LEDs Graphical LCD screen Display of measurements Display of switchgear network and machine diagnosis data Display of alarm messages Sepam reset or confirm data entry 0 Alarm acknowledement and clearing or move cursor up 1 LED test or move cursor down 2 Access to protection settings 3 Access to Sepam parameters 4 Entry of 2 passwords 5 PC connection port DSM303 PCRED301006EN June 2005 DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module Function When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user machine interface the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated advanced UMI It may be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating location m reduced depth lt 30 mm m a single module for each Sepam to be connected by one of the CCA772 or CCA774 cords 2 or 4 meters The module may not be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs Characteristics Weight 0 3 kg Assembly Flush mounted 25 C to 70 C Same characteristics as Sepam base units Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Description and dimensions The module is flush mounted and secured simply by its clips No screw typ
149. ained by looking up the measured values m measurement displayed if the sensor is short circuited T lt 35 C m measurement displayed if the sensor is disconnected or T gt 205 C Other faults Specific faults indicated by a screen m DSM303 version incompatible if version lt V0146 Replacement and repair When Sepam or a module is considered to be faulty have it replaced by a new product or module since the components cannot be repaired PCRED301006EN June 2005 Notes PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 7 37 Notes 7 38 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 ART 08556 51245225EN E0 2005 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Schneider Electric Industries SAS 89 boulevard Franklin Roosevelt F 92500 Rueil Malmaison France Tel 33 0 1 41 29 85 00 http www schneider electric com http www sepamrelay merlin gerin com PCRED301006EN 4 As standards specifications and designs change from time to time please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication amp Printed on recycled paper A Design Ameg Publication Schneider Electric Printed 06 2005
150. al Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 ms Charging time Operation This function gives the value of the breaking device operating mechanism charging time determined according to the device closed position status change contact and the end of charging contact connected to the Sepam logic inputs 2 The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES114 or MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement range 1 to 20 Unit s Accuracy 0 5 sec Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1s 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Switchgear diagnosis VT supervision functions ANSI code 60FL Operation The VT Voltage Transformer supervision function is used to supervise the complete phase and residual voltage measurement chain m voltage transformers m VT connection to Sepam m Sepam voltage analog inputs The function processes the following failures m partial loss of phase voltages detected by presence of negative sequence voltage and absence of negative sequence current m loss of all phase voltages detected by presence of current on one of the three phases and absence of all measured voltages
151. alies It is advisable to connect the Sepam units to the Modbus network one by one Make sure that the supervisor is sending frames to the relevant Sepam by checking the activity on the RS 232 RS 485 converter or the fiber optic converter if there is one and on the ACE module RS 485 network m check the wiring on each ACE module m check the tightness of the screw terminals on each ACE module m check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit m check that polarization is only at one point and that impedance matching is at both ends of the RS 485 network m check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969TP m check that the ACE909 2 or ACE919 converter used is connected powered and set up correctly Fiber optic network m check the connections on the ACE module m check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit m check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969FO m check that the converter or fiber optic star used is connected powered and set up correctly m for a fiber optic ring check that the Modbus master can handle the echo of its requests correctly In all cases m check all the ACE configuration parameters on SFT2841 m check the CPT2 and CPT9 diagnostic counters on the SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis screen 5 7 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Presentation Data which are similar from the monitoring and control
152. am below Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box single phase enerator 9 A 8 7 26 m turn the generator on m apply the generator V N voltage set to the rated secondary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vns Uns 3 between Sepam s phase 1 voltage input terminals via the test box m inject the generator current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs i e 1 A or 5 A and in phase vith the V N voltage applied i e generator phase displacement o4V N 0 to Sepam s phase 1 current input via the text box m use the SFT2841 software to check the following o the value indicated for 11 phase current is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CT o the value indicated for V1 phase to neutral voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VT Vnp Unp 3 o the value indicated for the phase displacement 91 V1 11 between the I1 current and V1 voltage is approximately equal to 0 m proceed in the same way by circular permutation with the phase 2 and 3 voltages and currents to check the 12 V2 2 V2 12 and 13 V3 g3 V3 13 values o turn the generator off 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Commissioning Description Check to be carried out when the voltages are supplied by a2 VT assembly with the VT primary circuits connected between phases of the d
153. ame position as block L1 and close the shield CCA613 remote test plug The CCA613 test plug panel mounted on the front of the cubicle and fitted with a 2 meter cord is used to transfer data from the integrated test plug to the CCA670 interface connector on the rear panel of DE52240 MT11022 LPCT type current sensors E oseo seo es0e8 A 880860800800 4 9 124448 gt na 347 6 Due 7 2 2 1 Dmag E secess 99 oe A aT E ssosesossossosesosss Sepam Phase LPCT Output Input ACE917 Injection box Adapter 1Aor5A im CCA613 CCA670 Sepam Accessory connection principle PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT11056 aene Pal ee 25 amp 125A 10000000 50 amp 250A 21000000 100 amp 500A 00100000 133 amp 666A 0 00 0000 200 amp 1000A 00001000 320 amp 1600A 00000100 400 amp 2000A 00000010 30431590A 00000004 Li L2 L3 LPCT settings L3 59631 LPCT current input connector connecteur entr e courant LPCT CCA670 Connection of the cords of the 3 sensors to Z the RJ45 plugs on the side of the CCA670 origin France Check plug LPCT plugs L Test plug Correspondence between microswitch settings and the selected rated current In 2 ratings possible values per set
154. ameters of each protection function in the same page m program logic parameter setting parameter setting of general installation and Sepam data m input data may be prepared ahead of time and transferred into the corresponding Sepam units in a single operation downloading function Main functions performed by SFT2841 m changing of passwords m entry of general characteristics ratings integration period m setting Sepam date and time m entry of protection settings m changing of program logic assignments m enabling disabling of functions m saving of files Saving m protection and parameter setting data may be saved m printing of reports is possible as well The SFT2841 software may also be used to recover disturbance recording files and provide graphic display using the SFT2826 software tool Operating assistance Access from all the screens to a help section which contains all the technical data reguired for Sepam installation and use 1 Modes accessed via 2 passwords protection setting level parameter setting level SFT2841 setting and operating software Presentation ee ie lit aj bim Di keir je aiem ia ere Z OSA Ones Kak ae aie OT ee trepestes U T measurement Mt11190 ET Soren MEEF LAT mag ar ame DENE as ZETA vedo Example of a measurement display screen NITI ope ORs Lc Jem ee are Z os OSE Bee li hu kir de lo EHTA ae i v IF Hom epi FE E NE ZA oi
155. amples Wb 1 00 4 05 1 10 1 15 120 1 25 1 30 1 35 140 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 41 80 Es 50 0 6931 0 6042 0 5331 0 4749 0 4265 0 3857 0 3508 0 3207 0 2945 0 2716 0 2513 0 2333 0 2173 0 2029 0 1900 0 1782 0 1676 55 0 7985 0 6909 0 6061 0 5376 0 4812 0 4339 0 3937 0 3592 0 3294 0 3033 0 2803 0 2600 0 2419 0 2257 0 2111 0 1980 0 1860 60 0 9163 0 7857 0 6849 0 6046 0 5390 0 4845 0 4386 0 3093 0 3655 0 3360 0 3102 0 2873 0 2671 0 2490 0 2327 0 2181 0 2048 65 1 0498 0 8905 0 7704 0 6763 0 6004 0 5379 0 4855 0 4411 0 4020 0 3698 0 3409 0 3155 0 2929 0 2728 0 2548 0 2386 0 2239 70 12040 1 0076 0 8640 0 7535 0 6657 0 5942 0 5348 0 4847 0 4418 0 4049 0 3727 0 3444 0 3194 0 2972 0 2774 0 2595 0 2434 75 1 3863 1 1403 0 9671 0 8373 0 7357 0 6539 0 5866 0 5302 0 4823 0 4412 0 4055 0 3742 0 3467 0 3222 0 3005 0 2809 0 2633 80 1 6094 1 2933 1 0822 0 9287 0 8109 0 7174 0 6413 0 5780 0 5245 0 4788 0 4394 0 4049 0 3747 0 3479 0 3241 0 3028 0 2836 85 1 8971 1 4739 1 2123 1 0292 0 8923 0 7853 0 6991 0 6281 0 5686 0 5180 0 4745 0 4366 0 4035 0 3743 0 3483 0 3251 0 3043 90 2 3026 1 6946 1 3618 1 1411 0 9808 0 8580 0 7605 0 6809 0 6147 0 5587 0 5108 0 4694 0 4332 0 4013 0 3731 0 3480 0 3254 95 19782 1 5377 1 2670 1 0780 0 9365 0 8258 0 7366 0 6630 0 6012 0 5486 0 5032 0 4638 0 4292 0 3986 0 3714 0 3470 100 2 3755 1 7513 1 4112 1 1856 1 0217 0 8958 0 7956 0 7138 0 6455 0 5878 0 538
156. antaneous action inst corresponds to protection pick up signal information 4 10 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT11208 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination functions ANSI code 68 Closed ring network Application Block diagram Sepam S42 Closed ring network protection may be provided using sand Sepam S42 which includes the following functions BH and BI2 m 2 units of directional phase 67 and earth fault 67N 2 BL protection functions a directional earth fault if o a unit to detect faults located in the line direction inst unit sa aal o a unit to detect faults located in the busbar direction directional overcurrent k EN m doubled logic discrimination function with inst unit 1 0 8 Is Output Oxx o sending of 2 blocking information according to the sendBit direction of the fault detected o receipt of 2 blocking information to block the Output Oyy directional protection relays according to their detection send BI2 direction directional earth fault inst unit 2 directional overcurrent inst unit 2 0 8 Is AVI nm Qo iza T 0 Bi2 T 200 ms inhibit send Bl if fault not cleared Receive ee a eee pe BI1 and BI2 time delay settings for time based discrimination overcurrent time delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 r z earth fault time 1 delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 time delay settings for logic dis
157. aracteristics Set point Rate 1 Rate 2 Setting Es1 alarm set point 50 to 300 50 to 300 Es2 tripping set point 50 to 300 50 to 300 Es0 initial heat rise 0 to 100 0 to 100 Resolution 1 1 Time constants Setting T1 running heat rise 1 mn to 600 mn 1 mn to 600 mn T2 stopped cooling 5 mn to 600 mn 5 mn to 600 mn Resolution 1 mn 1 mn Accounting for negative seguence component Setting K 0 2 25 4 5 9 Maximum equipment temperature according to insulation class 2 Setting Tmax 60 to 200 Resolution 1 Tripping time Accuracy 1 2 0r1s RMS current measurement Accuracy 5 Change of operating rate By current threshold Is Setting 0 25 to 8 Ib By logic input Switching of thermal settings Basis current for thermal operating rate 2 Setting Use of learnt cooling time constant T2 Setting 0 2 to 2 6 In Yes no 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Eguipment manufacturer data Es2 y alarm indication ambient correction temperature by ambient temperature 3 18 ere tripping logic input tripping inhibit thermal overload indication inhibit start gt inhibit closing indication PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT10860 Protection functions Example 1 The following data are available m time constants for on operation T1 and off operation T2 o T1 lt 25 min o T2 lt 70 min m maximum curve in steady state Ima
158. arameter and protection settings that have not been entered correctly proceeding as indicated in the SFT2841 software section of the Use chapter of this manual Conclusion Once the checking has been done and proven to be conclusive as of that phase the parameter and protection settings should not be changed any further and are considered to be final In order to be conclusive the tests which follow must be performed with these parameter and protection settings no temporary modification of any of the values entered with the aim of facilitating a test is permissible 8 DE 7 23 Commissioning Checking of phase current and voltage input connection With 3 phase generator Procedure m connect the 3 phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test terminal boxes using the plugs provided according to the appropriate diagram in terms of the number of VTs connected to Sepam o block diagram with 3 VTs connected to Sepam current test Sepam series 40 voltage test erminal box terminal box 3 phase t generator A g V g 7 24 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Commissioning Checking of phase current and voltage input connection With 3 phase generator block diagram with 2 VTs connected to Sepam current test Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box terminal box
159. are in the Input output indicator status screen m at the end of the test if necessary press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs Checking of logic output connection Procedure Check carried out using the Output relay test function activated via the SFT2841 software in the Sepam Diagnosis screen Only output O4 when used for the watchdog can be tested This function requires prior entry of the Parameter setting password m activate each output relay using the buttons in the SFT2841 software m the activated output relay changes status over a period of 5 seconds m observe the change of status of the output relay through the operation of the related switchgear if it is ready to operate and is powered or connect a voltmeter to the terminals of the output contact the voltage cancels itself out when the contact closes m at the end of the test press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs PCRED301006EN June 2005 Commissioning PCRED301006EN June 2005 Validation of the complete protection chain Checking of optional module connection Validation of the complete protection chain Principle The complete protection chain is validated during the simulation of a fault that causes tripping of the breaking device by Sepam Procedure m select one of the protection functions that triggers tripping of the breaking device and separately according to
160. ation Reading of remote settings remote reading Settings accessible for remote reading Reading of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely in 2 independent zones to enable operation with 2 masters Exchange principle Remote reading of settings remote reading takes place in two steps m first of all the master indicates the code of the function for which it wishes to know the settings by means of a request frame The request is acknowledged in the Modbus sense of the term to free the network m the master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a reply frame Each function has its own particular reply zone contents The time needed between the request and the reply is linked to Sepam s low priority cycle time and may vary from a few tens to several hundreds of milliseconds m setting zone 1 read 1E00h 1E7Ch read request 1E80h remote setting 1F00h 1F7Ch m setting zone 2 read 2000h 207Ch read reguest 2080h remote setting 2100h 217Ch 5 26 Access to remote settings Reguest frame The reguest is made by the master using a write word operation function 6 or 16 at the address 1E80h or 2080h of a 1 word frame consisting of the following 1E80h 2080h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 Function code B09 B08 BO7 B06 BO5 B04 BO3 Unit number B02 BO1 BOO
161. ations Processing upon loss of auxiliary voltage The V1 to V10 VL1 to VL 31 and V_TRIPCB V_CLOSECB V_INHIBCLOSE V_FLAGREC variables are saved in the event of a Sepam auxiliary power outage The status is restored when the power returns allowing the statuses produced by LATCH SR or PULSE type memory operators to be saved Special cases m brackets must be used in expressions which comprise different OR AND XOR or NOT operators o V1 VL1 AND 112 OR P27 27S 1 1 incorrect expression o V1 VL1 AND 112 OR P27 27S 1 1 correct expression o V1 VL1 OR 112 OR P27 27S 1 1 correct expression m only the V1 to V10 VL1 to VL31 and V_TRIPCB V CLOSECB V INHIBCLOSE V FLAGREC variables are allowed in the LATCH function m function parameters cannot be expressions o VL3 TON V1 AND V3 300 incorrect expression o VL4 V1 AND V3 o VL3 TON VL4 300 correct Use limit The number of operators and functions OR AND XOR NOT TON TOF SR PULSE is limited to 100 Examples of applications m latching of recloser final trip data By default this data is of the impulse type at the recloser output If required by operating conditions it may be latched as follows LATCH V1 V1 may be latched V1 P79 1 204 recloser final trip output V1 may then control a signal lamp or relay output in the matrix m latching of a signal lamp without latching the protection function Certain operating conditions call fo
162. ator device unavailable initialization phase or detection of internal failure m 9 parameterizable yellow signal lamps fitted with a standard label with SFT2841 a customized label can be printed on a laser printer E S key for clearing faults and resetting m 1 connection port for the link with the PC CCA783 cord the connector is protected by a sliding cover b51 b gt 51 lo gt 5IN b gt gt 5iN ext Ooff jlon Trip MT10276 Fixed or remote advanced UMI In addition to the basic UMI functions this version provides m a graphic LCD display for the display of measurements parameter protection settings and alarm and operating messages The number of lines size of characters and symbols are in accordance with the screens and language versions The LCD display is back lit when the user presses a key m a 9 key keypad with 2 operating modes White keys for current operation display of measurements 2 display of switchgear network diagnosis data 8 display of alarm messages 4 resetting 5 acknowledgment and clearing of alarms Blue keys activated in parameter and protection setting mode access to protection settings on b51 b gt 5i lo gt 5IN b gt gt 5iN ext Ooff lon Tip MT10277 8 access to Sepam parameter setting 9 used to enter the 2 passwords required to change protection and parameter settings The v D keys are used to browse through the menus and t
163. atrix parameter setting or by manual action m triggering by the grouping of all pick up signals of the protection functions in service m triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions m triggering by selected logic inputs m triggering by selected outputs Vx logic equations m manual triggering by a remote control order TC10 m manual triggering via the SFT2841 software tool Disturbance recording may be m inhibited via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order TC8 m validated via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order TC9 Block diagram disturbance recording triggering disturbance recording triggering by selected logic inputs disturbance recording triggering a by selected outputs Vx logic eguations manual disturbance SFT2841 recording triggering TC10 disturbance recording triggering inhibition of SFT2841 disturbance recording TC8 triggering validation of SFT2841 disturbance recording TC9 triggering manual disturbance SFT2841 recording triggering TC10 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Control and monitoring Switching of groups of settings functions Description There are two groups of settings group A group B for the phase overcurrent earth fault and directional phase overcurrent and directional earth fault protection functions Switching from one group of settings to another makes it po
164. balance CT ACE990 0 05 to 15 In0 min 0 1 A range 1 Vs0 set point Calculated VO sum of 3 voltages 2 to 80 of Unp Measured VO external VT 0 6 to 80 of Unp ANSI 81H Overfrequency 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz ANSI 81L Underfrequency 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz 0 1 s to 300 s 0 1 s to 300 s 1 Tripping as of 1 2 Is PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 3 5 Protection functions Undervoltage ANSI code 27 278 Operation The protection function is three phase and operates according to parameter setting with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage m it picks up if one of the 3 phase to neutral or phase to phase voltages drops below the Us or Vs set point m it includes a definite time delay T m with phase to neutral operation it indicates the faulty phase in the alarm associated with the fault Block diagram U21 or V1 lt Us or Vs DE52310 U32 or V2 lt Us or Vs p gt time delayed output U13 or V3 lt Us or Vs pick up signal Characteristics Us or Vs set point Setting 5 Unp or Vnp to 100 Unp or Vnp Accuracy 1 2 or 0 002 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 103 2 5 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time
165. be assigned an IP address The configuration parameters for the gateway s RS 485 interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m character format 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Configuration of communication on SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network on SFT2841 the following communication parameters must be defined m P address IP address of the remote Modbus TCP IP gateway m time out from 100 to 3000 ms A time out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most installations Communication via the TCP IP gateway may however be slowed down if other applications want Modbus TCP IP access at the same time The time out value should then be increased 2 to 3 seconds m number of retries from 1 to 6 Note 1 SFT2841 uses the Modbus TCP IP communication protocol Although communication is IP based use of SFT2841 is restricted to a local installation network based on an Ethernet network LAN Local Area Network The operation of SFT2841 over a WAN Wide Area Network cannot be guaranteed because of the presence of some routers or firewalls that may reject the Modbus protocol causing communication times that would be incompatible with Sepam Note 2 SFT2841 allows Sepam protection settings to be modified and direct activation of the outputs These operations which could involve the operation of electrical swi
166. ble must be stripped o the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp m the interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m green fittings m the interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC m the ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply not included in shielded cable Terminal block 0 is used to connect the distributed power supply module 8 DE 6 27 PE50024 DE51665 DE51666 Installation ACE937 fiber optic connection interface 1 70 mm with CCA612 cord connected ACE937 Rx TX TT FO FO 6 28 88 ACE937 Fiber optic interface Function The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star system This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord Characteristics Weight Assembly Power supply Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0 1 kg On symmetrical DIN rail Supplied by Sepam 25 C to 70 C Same characteristics as Sepam base units Fiber type Multimode glass Wavelength 820 nm infra red Type of connector ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Fiber optic Numerical Maximum Minimum optical Maximum diameter aperture attenuation power available length of um NA dBm km dBm fiber m 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 700
167. blocking reception 2 O3 send blocking information BI1 012 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction line m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction busbar Sepam S42 no R21 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 O3 send blocking information BI1 012 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction line m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction busbar PCRED301006EN June 2005 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination functions ANSI code 68 Substation with 2 parallel incomers Application Substations supplied by 2 or more parallel incomers may be protected using Sepam S42 or Sepam T42 by a combination of directional phase 67 and earth fault 67N protection functions with the logic discrimination function incomer 1 incomer 2 A Hy A 1 o 1 busbar MT11211 51 51 feeders V direction of 67 67N protection functions A direction of blocking signals To avoid both incomers tripping when a fault ocurs upstream from one incomer the incomer protection devices must operate as follows m protection 67 of the faulty incomer detects the fault current in the line direction the protection tripping direction sends a blocking information to inhibit the phase overcurrent protection functions 50 51 of both incomers and trips the incomer circuit breaker m protection function 67 of the fault free incomer is insensitive to fault cur
168. ce ON matching by 150 Q resistor 5 SW2 parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format same parameters as for RS 232 link and 2 wire RS 485 network Rate bauds sW2 1 SW2 2 Sw2 3 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Format Sw2 4 SW2 5 With parity check 0 Without parity check 1 1 stop bit compulsory for Sepam 0 2 stop bits 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 Ooj j oj joj oljo Converter configuration when delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 11 bit format with parity check m 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated Connection RS 232 link m to 2 5 mm screw type terminal block A m maximum length 10 m m Rx Tx RS 232 receiving sending by ACE909 2 m OV Rx Tx common do not earth 2 wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply m to female 9 pin sub D connector m 2 wire RS 485 signals L L m distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0 V Power supply m to 2 5 mm screw type terminal block m reversible phase and neutral m earthed via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50036 Installation ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converter PCRED301006EN June 2005 ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters Function The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master central computer equipped with an RS 485 type ser
169. charged TC1 remote open order Manual opening logic input 1 The close order is only available when the MES114 option is included PCRED301006EN June 2005 WV breaker closed O breaker closed Circuit breaker contactor control ANSI code 94 69 02 Inhibit closing shunt undervoltage Tripping shunt undervoltage Close order 4 7 Control and monitoring Circuit breaker contactor control functions ANSI code 94 69 RESET key Latching acknolwedgment acknowledgment TC5 The tripping outputs of all the protection functions and all the logic inputs may be a zi reset latched individually inhibit remate control 4 Logic outputs may not be latched The logic outputs set up in pulse mode maintain pulse type operation even when linked to latched data external reset Latched data are saved in the event of a power failure All latched data may be acknowledged locally on the UMI or remotely by means of a logic input or via the communication link The remote indication TS104 remains present after latching operations until acknowledgment has taken place The Latching acknowledgment function associated with the Circuit breaker contactor control function may be used to perform the ANSI 86 Lockout relay function ici TC circuit breaker position discrepancy a received amp
170. cking the quality of the telephone line error correction and data compression These options are not justified for communication between SFT2841 and Sepam which is based on the Modbus RTU protocol Their effect on communication performance may be the opposite of the expected result It is therefore highly advisable to m invalidate the error correction data compression and telephone line quality monitoring options m use the same end to end communication speed between o the Sepam network and the called modem o the called modem Sepam side and the calling modem PC side o the PC and the calling modem see recommended configurations table Sepam network Telephone network PC modem interface 38400 bauds V34 modulation 33600 bauds 38400 bauds 19200 bauds V34 modulation 19200 bauds 19200 bauds 9600 bauds V32 modulation 9600 bauds 9600 bauds Industrial configuration profile The following table shows the main characteristics of the modem on the Sepam side These characteristics match a configuration profile commonly known as an industrial profile as against the configuration of modems used in offices Depending on the type of modem used the configuration will either be via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual Characteristics of the industrial profile configurati
171. crimination overcurrent logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 earth fault logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 directional z1 earth fault logic delayed unit 1 4 direction of 67 67N protection functions directional amp A direction of blocking signals delayed ront logic With the combination of the directional protection functions and the logic discrimination function the blocking reception 1 0 T faulty section may be isolated with minimum delay by logic input T 30 ms m the tripping of the circuit breakers on either side of the SSL tripping w a fault directional i Blocking information are prepared by protection ore PT a gic functions 67 and 67N name z 1 rer E directional Priority is given to protection function 67 when overcurrent logic protection functions 67 and 67N detect faults in delayed unit 2 amp opposite directions at the same time the blocking i 0 T information is determined by the direction of the fault blocking reception 2 a logic input T 30 ms detected by protection function 67 The instantaneous output of protection function 67 1 According to parameter setting by default O3 for send BI1 and O12 for send BI2 activated at 80 of the Is set point is used to send blocking information This avoids uncertainly when the fault current is close to the Is set point PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin
172. ct operation the MV core balance CT secondary output terminal S1 must be connected to the ACE990 input terminal with the lowest index Ex K value ACE990 input Residual current Min MV core terminals to be sensor setting balance CT connected power 0 00578 E1 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 00676 E2 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 00885 E1 E4 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 00909 E3 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 01136 E2 E4 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 01587 E1 E3 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 01667 E4 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 02000 E3 E4 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 02632 E2 E3 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 04000 E1 E2 ACE990 range 1 0 2 VA 0 05780 E1 E5 ACE990 range 2 2 5 VA 0 06757 E2 E5 ACE990 range 2 2 5 VA 0 08850 E1 E4 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 09091 E3 E5 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 11364 E2 E4 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 15873 E1 E3 ACE990 range 2 4 5 VA 0 16667 E4 E5 ACE990 range 2 4 5 VA 0 20000 E3 E4 ACE990 range 2 5 5 VA 0 26316 E2 E3 ACE990 range 2 7 5 VA Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current lO input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam series 80 m to residual current 10 input on connector terminals 15 and 14 shielding m to residual current l 0 input on connector terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended cables m cable between core balance CT and ACE990 le
173. ctions 0 1lb excessive ST starting time we a locked TJ i rotor L 0 11b excessive aA OT starting time locked y rotor a na Case of excessive starting time excessive ST LT starting ime lt j i i 1 1 i 1 I i 1 1 1 1 TE S A SAREE E E ce 1 1 i 1 L 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 Case of locked rotor 0 1lb e excessive starting 4 time locked rotor output i rotor rotation Case of starting locked rotor 3 16 Excessive starting time locked rotor ANSI code 48 51LR 14 Operation This function is three phase It comprises two parts m excessive starting time during starting the protection picks up when one of the 3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the ST time delay normal starting time m locked rotor o at the normal operating rate after starting the protection picks up when one of the 3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the LT time delay of the definite time type o locked on start large motors may have very long starting time due to their inertia or the reduce voltage supply This starting time is longer than the permissive rotor blocking time To protect such a motor LTS timer initiate a trip if a start has been detected I gt Is or if the motor speed is zero For a normal start the input 123 zero speed switch disable
174. d make up the data zone Since the configuration and data files are adjacent a frame may contain the edn of the configuration and the beginning of the data file of a record It is up to the remote monitoring and control system software to reconstruct the files in accordance with the transmitted number of usable bytes and the size of the files indicated in the identification zone Acknowledging a transfer To inform Sepam that a record block that it has just read has been received correctly the master must write the number of the last exchange that it has carried out in the exchange number field and set the number of usable bytes in the data zone of the exchange word to zero Sepam only increments the exchange number if new acquisition bursts are present Rereading the identification zone To ensure that the record has not been modified during its transfer by a new record the master rereads the contents of the identification zone and ensures that the date of the recovered record is still present 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication Reading Sepam identification Presentation The Read Device Identification function is used to access in a standardized manner the information required to clearly identify a device The description is made up of a set of objects ASCII character strings Sepam series 40 accepts the read identification function conformity level 02 For a complete description of the function
175. ding to parameter setting and MES114 MES114E MES114F or MET148 2 input output module options 1 For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit 2 2 modules possible 3 Exclusive choice phase to neutral voltage or phase to phase voltage for each of the 2 relays 8 DE 1 3 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Sepam series 40 Technical characteristics Minimum weight base unit with basic UMI and without MES114 1 4 kg Maximum weight base unit with advanced UMI and MES114 1 9kg Current transformer Input impedance lt 0 02 Q 1 A or 5 A CT with CCA630 Consumption lt 0 02 VAat1A 1 A to 6250 A ratings lt 0 5 VA at5A Rated thermal withstand 4ln 1 second overload 100 In Voltage transformer Input impedance gt 100 ko 220 V to 250 kV ratings Input voltage 100 to 230 V3 V Rated thermal withstand 240 V 1 second overload 480 V Temperature sensor input MET148 2 module Type of sensor Pt 100 Ni 100 120 Isolation from earth None None Current injected in sensor 4mA 4mA Maximum distance between sensor and module 1km Voltage 24to 250 VDC 110to125VDC 110VAC 220 to 250 V DC 220 to 240 V AC Range 19 2 to 275 V DC 88to 150 VDC 88to 132 VAC 176to 275 V DC 176to 264 V AC Freguency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Typical consumption 3mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA Typical switching threshold 14 V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC Input limit voltage At state 1 z 19 V DC z 88 V DC z 88 V AC z 176 V DC z 176 V
176. disturbance records are lost when the device is switched on and when the logic eguations or alarm messages are changed Transfer Files may be transferred locally or remotely m locally using a PC which is connected to the front panel connector and has the SFT2841 software tool m remotely using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control system Recovery The signals are recovered from a record by means of the SFT2826 software tool Principle stored record MT10181 triggering event Characteristics Record content Set up file date channel characteristics measuring chain transformer ratio Sample file 12 values per period recorded signal Analog signals 2 recorded 4 current channels l1 12 13 10 3 voltage channels V1 V2 V3 or U21 U32 VO Logical states recorded 10 logic inputs logic outputs O1 to O4 pick up 1 data item configurable by the logic equation editor Number of records stored 1to 19 Total duration of a record 1sto 10s The total records plus one should not exceed 20 s at 50 Hz and 16 s at 60 Hz Examples at 50 Hz 1x 10 s record 3 x 5 s records 19x 1 s records Periods before triggering event 0 to 99 periods File format COMTRADE 97 1 According to parameter setting with the SFT2841 software and factory set to 36 periods 2 According to the type of sensors PCRED301006EN June 2005 Machine operati
177. ds to 40 In PCRED301006EN June 2005 Negative sequence unbalance ANSI code 46 The following standardized tripping curves are proposed m IEC standard inverse time SIT A m IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B m IEC extremely inverse time EIT C m IEEE moderately inverse IEC D m IEEE very inverse IEC E m IEEE extremely inverse IEC F The curve equations are given in the chapter entilled IDMT protection functions IDMT protection Schneider curve For li gt Is the time delay depends on the value of li Ib lb basis current of the protected equipment defined when the general parameters are set T corresponds to the time delay for li Ib 5 The tripping curve is defined according to the following equations m for Is Ib lt li lb lt 0 5 3 19 di lb 15 m for 0 5 lt li lb lt 5 _ 4 64 di Ib 9 96 m for li lb gt 5 t T Block diagram DE50557 MT11101 t Schneider curve gt time delayed output pick up signal Characteristics Curve Setting Definite standardized IDMT a choice of 6 Schneider IDMT Is set point Setting Definite time 10 Ib lt Is lt 500 Ib Standardized IDMT 10 Ib lt Is lt 100 Ib IEC IEEE Schneider IDMT 10 Ib lt Is lt 50 Ib Resolution 1 Accuracy 5 Time delay T Setting Definite time 100 ms s T lt 300 s IDMT 100 mssT lt 1s Resolution 10 ms ou 1 digit Accuracy 1 Definite tim
178. ds to m find out the characteristics of the records stored in an identification zone m read the contents of the different files m acknowledge each transfer m reread the identification zone to ensure that the record still appears in the list of records available 2 transfer zones are available m transfer zone 1 O request frame 2200h 2203h o identification zone starting at 2204h o reply frame starting at 2300h m transfer zone 2 O request frame 2400h 2403h o identification zone starting at 2404h o reply frame starting at 2500h PCRED301006EN June 2005 Disturbance recording Reading the identification zone Given the volume of data to be transmitted the master must ensure that there are data to be recovered and prepare the exchanges when necessary The identification zone described below is read by the reading of N words starting at the address 2204h 2404h m 2 reserve words forced to 0 m size of record configuration files encoded in 1 word m size of record data files encoded in 2 words m number of records encoded in 1 word m date of record 1 most recent encoded in 4 words see format below m date of record 2 encoded in 4 words see format below E m date of record 19 least recent encoded in 4 words see format below m 28 reserve words All of these data are consecutive Reading the contents of the different files Request frame The master makes the request by writing the date of the record t
179. dule Function The MET148 2 module may be used to connect 8 temperature sensors RTDs of the same type m Pt100 Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs according to parameter setting m 3 wire temperature sensors m a single module for each Sepam series 20 base unit to be connected by one of the CCA770 CCA772 or CCA774 cords 0 6 2 or 4 meters m 2 modules for each Sepam series 40 or series 80 base unit to be connected by CCA770 CCA772 or CCA774 cords 0 6 2 or 4 meters The temperature measurement e g in a transformer or motor winding is utilized by the following protection functions m thermal overload to take ambient termperature into account m temperature monitoring Characteristics Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0 2 kg On symmetrical DIN rail 25 C to 70 C Same characteristics as Sepam base units Isolation from earth Current injected in RTD 4mA Description and dimensions A Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4 B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8 63 RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord according to application Grounding earthing terminal 1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m XK if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rc if the module is the last interlinked module 2 Jum
180. e 2 or 25 ms IDMT 5 or 35 ms Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 55 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 13 Protection functions ANSI code Determination of tripping time for different negative sequence current values for a given Schneider curve Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds t s 10000 Negative seguence unbalance 46 IDMT tripping Schneider curve to the reguired negative seguence current 5000 The tripping time is egual to KT Example 2000 given a tripping curve with the setting T lt 0 5 s 1000 What is the tripping time at 0 6 Ib Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds 500 to 60 of Ib The table reads K 7 55 The tripping time is equal to 200 0 5 x 7 55 3 755 s 100 50 20 max curve T 1s 10 5 2 1 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 05 min curve T 0 1s 0 02 0 01 0 005 0 002 0 001 Vib 0 05 0 1 0 2 03 05 07 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 li Ib 10 15 20 25 30 33 33 35 40 45 50 55 57 7 60 65 70 75 K 99 95 54 50 35 44 25 38 19 32 16 51 15 34 1256 10 53 9 00 8 21 7 84 755 7 00 6 52 6 11 li Ib cont d 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 K cont d 5 74 5 42 5 13 4 87 4 64 4 24 3 90 3 61 3 37 3 15 2 96 2 80 2 65 2 52 2 40 2 29 li Ib cont d 22 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 K cont d 2 14 210 2 01
181. e RTD assignment table other applications is selected T2 is not calculated Once the calculation has been made the calculated value may be used to replace the T2 2 parameter in two ways according to the configuration m automatically in which case each new calculated value updates the T2 constant used m or manually by entering the value in the T2 parameter 1 MET148 2 module RTD 8 predefined for ambient temperature measurement 2 It is advisable to use the calculated T2 if the equipment has carried out at least three starting cycles followed by cooling 8 DE 3 17 DE50479 Protection functions Start inhibit The thermal overload protection can inhibit the closing of the motor s control device until the heat rise drops back down below a value that allows restarting This value takes into account the heat rise produced by the motor when starting The inhibition function is grouped together with the starts per hour protection and the indication START INHIBIT informs the user Saving of heat rise The current heat rise is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Inhibition of tripping Tripping of the thermal overload protection may be inhibited by the logic input Inhibit thermal overload when required by the process Use of two operating rates The thermal overload protection function may be used to protect equipment with two operating rates for example m transformers with two ventilation modes with or
182. e accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 1 to 1 IND CAP Accuracy 1 0 01 typical Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 01 Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 At In Unp cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Metering functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Active and reactive energy Accumulated active and reactive energy Operation This function gives the following for the active and reactive energy values m accumulated energy conveyed in one direction m accumulated energy conveyed in the other direction It is based on measurement of the fundamental component The accumulated energy values are saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the A key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Active energy Reactive energy Metering capacity 0 to 2 1 108 MW h 0 to 2 1 108 Mvar h Unit MW h Mvar h Accuracy 1 typical 1 typical 0 Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits Resolution 0 1 MW h 0 1 Mvar h 1 At In Unp cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Accumulated active and reactive energy by
183. e dead time a closing order is given which activates the reclaim time If the protection unit detects the fault before the end of the time delay a tripping order is given and the following reclosing cycle is activated after all the active cycles have been run if the fault still persists a final trip order is given a message appears on the display and closing is locked out until acknowledgment takes place according to the parameter setting of the protection function m closing on a fault If the circuit breaker closes on a fault or if the fault appears before the end of the safety time delay the recloser is inhibited Recloser inhibition conditions The recloser is inhibited according to the following conditions m voluntary open or close order m recloser put out of service m receipt of a inhibtion order on the logic input m activation of the breaker failure function 50BF m appearance of a switchgear related fault such as trip circuit fault control fault SF6 pressure drop m opening of the circuit breaker by a protection unit that does not run reclosing cycles e g frequency protection pr by external tripping In such cases a final trip message appears Extension of the dead time If during a reclosing cycle reclosing of the circuit breaker is impossible because breaker recharging is not finished following a drop in auxiliary voltage recharging time is longer the dead time may be extended up to the time at which the c
184. e fastener is required Cut out for flush mounting mounting plate thickness lt 3 mm Side view DE50055 a 144 0 2 15 RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord 1 Mounting clip 2 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tighteness gasket delivered with the DSM303 module to be installed if necessary Connection Pa RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor Rc 6 23 Installation Communication accessories selection guide There are 2 types of Sepam communication accessories m communication interfaces which are essential for connecting Sepam to the communication network m converters and other accessories as options which are used for complete implementation of the communication network Communication interface selection guide Type of network S LAN or E LAN S LAN or E LAN S LAN or E LAN S LAN E LAN S LAN E LAN Protocol Modbus u u u E E DNP3 u CEI 60870 5 103 Physical interface RS 485 2 wire L u 4 wire Fiber optic ST Star E u Ring m 2 See details on page 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 29 1 Only one connection possible S LAN or E LAN 2 Except with the Modbus protocol Converter selection guide Converter Port to supervisor 1
185. e greatest average active or reactive power value since the last reset The values are refreshed after each integration interval an interval that may be set from 5 to 60 mn common interval with peak demand phase currents The values are saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Resetting to zero m press the es key on the advanced UMI display unit when a peak demand is displayed m via the clear command in the SFT2841 software m via the communication link remote control order TC6 Characteristics Active power P Reactive power Q Measurement range 1 5 Sn at 999 MW 1 5 Sn at 999 Mvar Unit kW MW kvar Mvar Accuracy 1 typical 2 1 typical 2 Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 kW 0 1 kvar Integration interval 5 10 15 30 60 mn 5 10 15 30 60 mn 1 Sn V3 Unp In 2 At In Unp cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Power factor cos 6 Operation The power factor is defined by coso P P2 Q It expresses the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase to neutral voltages The and signs and IND inductive and CAP capacitive indications give the direction of power flow and the type of load Readout The measurement may b
186. e key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 999 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 mn Refresh period 1 second typical 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Machine operation assistance functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Running hours counter and operating time Starting current and starting overload time Running hours counter and operating time The counter gives the running total of time during which the protected device motor generator or transformer has been operating I gt 0 1 Ib The initial counter value may be modified using the SFT2841 software The counter is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the CA key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Range 0 to 65535 Unit hours Starting current and starting overload time Operation The starting overload time is the time between the moment at which one of the 3 phase currents exceeds 1 2 Ib and the moment at which the 3 currents drop back below 1 2 Ib The maximum phase current obtained during this period is the starting overload current The 2 values are saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m
187. e module cord L 4m 59663 CCA612 RS 485 network interface communication cord L lt 3m 59664 CCA783 PC connection cord 59666 CCA613 remote LPCT test plug 59667 ACE917 LPCT injection adapter 59668 CCA620 20 pin screw type connector 59669 CCA622 20 pin ring lug connector 59670 AMT840 mounting plate 59672 ACE990 core balance CT interface for l0 input 59676 Kit 2640 with 2 sets of spare connectors 59679 SFT2841 CD ROM with SFT2841 and SFT2826 software without CCA783 cord 59680 Substation application type S40 59681 Substation application type S41 59682 Substation application type S42 59683 Transformer application type T40 59684 Transformer application type T42 59685 Motor application type M41 59686 Generator application type G40 59720 ACE969TP 2 wire RS 485 multi protocol interface Modbus DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 59721 ACE969FO fiber optic multi protocol interface Modbus DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 1 Reference 59645 MES108 41 40 module cancelled and replaced by reference 59646 PCRED301006EN June 2005 6 3 DE50928 DE50926 Installation e 0000000000 O GOGO 222 176 Front view of Sepam 236 AMT840 mounting plate 6 4 Base unit Dimensions Dimensions Mounting g 40 clip
188. e of current sag 1 06 Is Is 0 1 Ib pick up gt _ lt signal 0 lt 15 ms time delayed output 0 Case of circuit breaker tripping PCRED301006EN June 2005 Phase undercurrent ANSI code 37 Block diagram sN I lt ls l 8 time delayed a output pick up signal I gt 0 1 Ib Characteristics Is set point Setting 15 Ib lt Is lt 100 Ib by steps of 1 Accuracy 5 Pick up drop out ratio 106 5 for Is gt 0 1 In T time delay K Setting Z 50 ms lt T lt 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time lt 60 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 11 Protection functions Temperature monitoring ANSI code 38 49T Operation This protection is associated with an RTD of the Pt100 platinum 100 Q at 0 C or nickel 100 Q nickel 120 Q type in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards m it picks up when the monitored temperature is greater than the Ts set point m it has two independent set points o alarm set point o tripping set point m when the protection is activated it detects whether the RTD is shorted or disconnected o RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than 35 C measurement displayed o RTD disconnection is detected if the measured temperature is greater
189. e unit Other voltage input connection schemes The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected directly to the connector marked E The 3 impedance matching and isolation transformers are integrated in the Sepam series 40 base unit Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam Phase voltage sensor parameter setting Residual voltage sensor parameter setting Voltages measured Values calculated Measurements unavailable Protection functions unavailable according to type of Sepam 3V 3V sum V1 V2 V3 U21 U32 U13 VO Vd Vi f None None U21 U32 External VT U21 U32 VO U13 V1 V2
190. ed to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software General Characteristics tab In Rated phase current 20r3CT1A 5A 1 A to 6250 A sensor primary current 3 LPCTs 25 A to 3150 A Ib Base current according to rated power of equipment 0 4 to 1 3 In Ino Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents See In rated phase current CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 2 A 5 Aor 20 A rating 1 A 5 A CT CSH30 interposing ring CT 1 A to 6250 A Ino In 1 A 5 A CT CSH30 interposing ring CT 1 A to 6250 A In0 In 10 Sensitivity x10 Core balance CT ACE990 the core According to current monitored and use balance CT ratio of ACE990 1 n must be such that 50 lt n lt 1500 Unp Rated primary phase to phase voltage 220 V to 250 kV Vnp rated primary phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp v3 Uns Rated secondary phase to phase voltage 3 VTs V1 V2 V3 100 110 115 120 200 230 V 2 VTs U21 U32 100 110 115 120 V 1VT V1 100 110 115 120 V Unso Secondary zero seguence voltage for primary zero Uns 3 or Uns v3 sequence voltage Unp v3 Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz Integration period for demand current and peak demand current and power 5 10 15 30 60 mn Pulse type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy 0 1 kW h to 5 MW h Increments reactive energy 0 1 kvar h to 5 Mvar h
191. ee Type of Sepam Switchboard e nena Serial number OJ CUBIC GE yoo ize isios ccc sccaceccedcassacceiccecccsaccesucsdunsaceccceads Software version V Type of check Test performed Result Display Residual current input Injection of 5 A into the core Injected current value connection balance CT primary circuit JO Siete o When applicable VT rated primary phase to neutral secondary injection voltage Unp v3 VO Ein of the rated phase to neutral voltage of a phase VT Uns 3 Phase displacement VO 10 0 QO E Residual voltage input Secondary injection VT rated primary phase to neutral connection of the rated voltage of the VTs voltage Unp v3 VO S iriri o in an open delta arrangement Uns v3 or Uns 3 When applicable CT rated primary current secondary injection lO SN nani of CT rated current ie 1 Aor5A Phase displacement VO 10 0 QOS EEA Residual current and Injection of 5 A into the core Injected current value residual voltage input balance CT primary circuit ii REN oO connection Secondary injection VT rated primary phase to neutral of the rated voltage of the VTs voltage Unp v3 VO in an open delta arrangement Uns v3 or Uns 3 Phase displacement g VO 10 0 QO Sinaj Tests performed On mi mn sni m mom ee E T Signatures O NE EI EEA Comments PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 7 35 MT11196 Commission
192. elivered by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box using the plug in an open delta assembly and when the residual provided current is obtained by a specific sensor such as a wire between the generator current terminals to inject current into the primary m CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT circuit of the core balance CT or CT with the wire passing through the core balance m CSH30 interposing ring CT whether it is installedon CT or CT in the P1 P2 direction with P1 the busbar end and P2 the cable end the secondary circuit of a single 1 A or 5 A CT which encompasses the 3 phases or on the neutral connection of the three 1 A or 5 A phase CTs m other core balance CT connected to an ACE990 interface current test Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box terminal box N V1 V2 V3 N single phase or 3 phase generator A el V A m turn the generator on m apply a V N voltage set to the rated secondary voltage of the VTs connected in an open delta arrangement i e Uns 3 or Uns 3 m inject an current setto 5 A and in phase with the voltage applied i e generator phase displacement a V N I 0 m use the SFT2841 software to check the following the value indicated for the measured 10 residual current is approximately equal to 5A the value indicated for the measured VO residual voltage is a
193. epam parameter setting The messages are visible on the display units of Sepams equipped with the advanced UMI and in the SFT2841 Alarms screen m the number and type of predefined messages depend on type of Sepam The table below gives the complete list of all predefined messages List of messages English factory PHASE FAULT 2 Local language e g French DEFAUT PHASE 2 Voltage restrained phase overcurrent O C V REST DEF PHASE RET U 2 Earth fault EARTH FAULT DEFAUT TERRE Circuit breaker failure BREAKER FAILURE DEF DISJONCTEUR Unbalance negative sequence UNBALANCE DESEQUILIBRE Directional phase overcurrent DIR PHASE FAULT 2 DEFAUT PHASE DIR 2 Directional earth fault DIR EARTH FAULT DEFAUT TERRE DIR Active overpower REVERSE P RETOUR P Reactive overpower REVERSE Q RETOUR Q Thermal overload THERMAL ALARM ECHAUF ALARME THERMAL TRIP ECHAUFT DECL Locked rotor Locked rotor at startup ROTOR BLOCKING STRT OCKED ROTR BLOCAGE ROTOR BLOC ROTOR DEM Excessive starting time LONG START DEMARRAGE LONG Number of starts START INHIBIT DEMARRAGE INHIBE Phase undercurrent UNDER CURRENT COURANT lt lt Overvoltage OVERVOLTAGE 6 TENSION gt gt 3 Undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE 3 TENSION lt lt 3 Positive sequence undervoltage UNDERVOLT PS TENSION Vd lt lt ROTATION ROTATION Neutral voltage displacement VO FAULT
194. equired for the core balance CT 2 VA core balance CT gt 0 1 VA OK Connect the core balance secondary to ACE990 input terminals E2 and E4 Set Sepam up with In0 0 0136 x 400 4 5 A This value of In0 may be used to monitor current between 0 45 A and 67 5 A Wiring of MV core balance secondary circuit m MV core balance CT S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal m MV core balance CT S2 output to ACE990 E4 input terminal PCRED301006EN June 2005 ACE990 Core balance CT interface Terminals connection Connection of core balance CT Only one core balance CT may be connected to the ACE990 interface The secondary circuit of the MV core balance CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990 interface input terminals To define the 2 inputs it is necessary to know the following m core balance CT ratio 1 n m core balance CT power m close approximation of rated current InO INO is a Sepam general setting and defines the earth fault protection setting range between 0 1 In0 and 15 Ino The table below may be used to determine m the 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV core balance CT secondary m the type of residual current sensor to set m the exact value of the rated residual current InO setting given by the following formula In0 k x number of core balance CT turns with k the factor defined in the table below The core balance CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for corre
195. er or not assigned to predefined functions may be used for the SFT2841 customization functions according to specific application needs o in the control matrix to link inputs to output relays LED indications or display messages o in the logic equation editor as logic equation variables m the control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation Logic inputs Open position E u E u E 111 Closed position u u E u E 112 Logic discrimination receive blocking input 1 E a a a Free Logic discrimination receive blocking input 2 a Free Switching of groups of settings A B a a a a a 113 External reset u u u u E Free External tripping 1 a a a a a Free External tripping 2 a a a Free External tripping 3 a a a a u Free Buchholz gas tripping a Free Thermostat tripping a Free Pressure tripping a Free Thermistor tripping a a a Free Buchholz gas alarm a Free Thermostat alarm a Free Pressure alarm a Free Thermistor alarm m m E Free End of charging position a a E a Free Inhibit remote control a a a a a Free SF6 a E L a E Free Inhibit recloser a a Free External synchronization a a a a a 121 Inhibit thermal overload i a a Free Switching of thermal settings a a Free Motor re acceleration a Free Rotor rotation detection a Free Inhibit undercurrent a Free Inhibit closing a a a a a Free Open order u u L u E
196. er position with taking into account circuit breaker position 3 28 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Breaker failure ANSI code 50BF Example of setting Below is a case that may be used to determine the time delay setting of the breaker failure function Overcurrent protection setting T inst Circuit breaker operating time 60 ms Auxiliary relay operating time to open the upstream breaker or breakers 10 ms fault E 4 clearing of fault E without breaker failure rising time output Sosia Sepam output relay 40 ms atu circuit breaker margin opening time ms nmmn overshoot time 20 ms Sepam output relay trip relay upstream circuit breaker Time delay T of the 50BF protection function with 20 ms margin 4 T 10 60 20 20 110 ms h Fault clearance time 40 110 10 10 60 230 ms 15 ms gt The breaker failure function time delay is the sum of the following times Sepam O1 output relay pick up time 10 ms Circuit breaker opening time 60 ms Breaker failure function memory time 20 ms To avoid unwanted tripping of the upstream breakers choose a margin of approximately 20 ms This gives us a time delay T 110 ms Characteristic Is set point Setting 0 2 In to 2 In Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1A Drop out pick up ratio 87 5 10 Time delay Setting 0 05 s to 300 s Accuracy 2 or from 0 to 15 ms Res
197. erature 5 C to 55 C 5 ns fast transient bursts 60255 22 4 4 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 1 kV common mode 0 5 kV differential mode 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode 1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255 22 1 1 2 50 us impulse wave 60255 5 8 E 6 33 DE51667 DE50038 DE51668 Installation 45 65 _ Male 9 pin sub D connector supplied with the ACE909 2 ACE909 2 6 34 ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter Description and dimensions A Terminal block for RS 232 link limited to 10 m Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS 485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC 2 Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn 3 Indication LEDs m ON OFF on if ACE909 2 is energized m Tx on if RS 232 sending by ACE909 2 is active m Rx on if RS 232 receiving by ACE909 2 is active 4 SWI parameter setting of 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors Function sw1 1 sw1 2 sw1 3 Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q ON Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q ON 2 wire RS 485 network impedan
198. ers Word address Bit address Access Function Format TC1 TC16 OOFO OFOO R W 3 4 6 16 B 1 2 5 15 STC1 STC16 00F1 0F10 R W 3 4 6 16 B 1 2 5 15 Status zone The status zone is a table that contains the Sepam check word pre assigned remote indication bits TS logic inputs logic eguation bits logic outputs LEDs and analog output control word The TS assignments are discussed in detail on page 5 19 Status Word address Bit address Access Modbus function Format enabled Sepam check word 0100 1000 R 3 4 or 1 2 7 x TS1 TS16 0101 1010 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS17 TS32 0102 1020 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS33 TS48 0103 1030 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS49 TS64 reserved 0104 1040 R 3 40r1 2 B TS65 TS80 0105 1050 R 3 4 0r 1 2 B TS81 TS96 0106 1060 R 3 4 0r 1 2 B TS97 TS112 0107 1070 R 3 4or1 2 B TS113 TS128 0108 1080 R 3 40r1 2 B TS129 TS144 0109 1090 R 3 40r1 2 B Reserved O10A 10A0 Logic inputs 010B 10B0 R 3 40r1 2 B Logic eguation bits 010C 10C0 R 3 4or1 2 B Logic outputs 010D 10D0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B LEDs 010E 10E0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Analog output 010F 10F0 R W 3 6 16 16S Address word 010B logic input status bit address 10B0 to 10BF Bit F E D Cc B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Inputs x 126 125 124 123 122 121 114 113 112 111 Address word 010C logic equation bit status bit address 10C0 to 10CF Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Equation V8 V7 V6 V5 V4 V3 V2 V1 Bit F E D C B A 9 8 Equation V_FLAGREC V INHIBCL
199. ery inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions a o o a a a a 3 44 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions xi 8 CSH core bal CT 8 CT CSH30 Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Block diagram o 10 gt Iso core bal CT ACE990 V1 v2 x V3 10 busbar T o time delayed vo external VT o PCRED301006EN June 2005 pick up signal vo VO gt Vso and to logic discrimination Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves 10 gt IsO time delayed output l DE50247 10 gt IsO pick up signal LA LA La lati i H tripping value of internal time delay counter 10 gt IsO time delayed output DE50248 10 gt IsO pick up signal LI time delay l l l L value of internal l counter l l 3 45 Protection functions 1 Ino In if the sum of the three phase currents is used for the measurement InO sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT InO In of the CT if the measurement is takenbya1Aor5A current transformer CSH30 InO In of the CT 10 if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer CSH30 with the sensitivity
200. etically the current setting Is corresponds to the maximum current that may be permanent it is generally the rated current of the protected equipment cable transformer The time delay T is set to the operation point at 10Is on the curve This setting is determined taking into account the constraints involved in discrimination with the upstream and downstream protection devices The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of point A on the operation curve IA tA e g the point that corresponds to the maximum fault current affecting the downstream protection device Problem 2 Knowing the type of IDMT the current setting Is anda point k Ik tk on the operation curve determine the time delay setting T On the standard curve of the same type read the operation time tsk that corresponds to the relative current Ik Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current l 10 Is 3 54 General IDMT protection functions The time delay setting that should be made in order for the operation curve to pass through the point k Ik tk is tk T Ts10x 5 MT10537 gt Is Another practical method The table on the next page gives the values of _ _ts l isto asa function of Ts In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay read the value K isk in the line for IK Is The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through the point k Ik tk is
201. events 8 bits 0 4 bo7 bO6 bOS b04 b03 b0O2 bO1 bOO Number of events 0 4 Description of the LSB of the exchange word Sepam indicates the number of significant events in the event table in the least significant byte of the exchange word Each non significant event word is initialized to zero Event table acknowledgment To inform Sepam that the block read by the master has been correctly received the master writes the number of the last exchange made in the Exchange number field and resets the Number of events field of the exchange word to zero After acknowledgment the 4 events in the event table are initialized to zero and the old acknowledged events are erased in Sepam Until the exchange word written by the master becomes X 0 with X number of the previous exchange that the master wishes to acknowledge the exchange word in the table remains at X number of previous events Sepam only increments the exchange number when new events are present X 1 number of new events If the event table is empty Sepam performs no processing operations when the master reads the event table or the exchange word The data are encoded in binary format Clearing an event queue Writing a value xxFFh in the exchange word any exchange number event number FFh reinitializes the corresponding event queue all stored events not yet transmitted are deleted Sepam in data
202. exception reply incorrect address The first word in the zone function code and unit number may have the following values m xxyy with O function code xx different from 00 and FFh o unit number yy different from FFh The settings are available and confirmed They word is a copy of the reguest frame The zone contents remain valid until the next reguest is made m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant m xxFFh with the function code xx different from 00 and FFh The read request for the settings of the designated function is not valid The function is not included in the particular Sepam or remote reading of it is not authorized refer to the list of functions which accommodate remote reading of settings PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN June 2005 Access to remote settings Remote setting Data that can be remotely set Writing of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely Exchange principle Remote setting is allowed for Sepam units Remote setting is carried out for a given function unit by unit It takes place in two steps m first of all the master indicates the function code and unit number followed by the values of all the settings in the write request frame The request is acknowledged to free the net
203. extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types PCRED301006EN June 2005 besi tripping value of internal time delay counter Characteristics Tripping curve Setting Confirmation Definite time IDMT chosen according to list on page 3 26 Setting by undervoltage unit 1 by negative sequence overvoltage none by confirmation Is set point Setting Definite time 0 1 In lt Is lt 24 In expressed in Amps IDMT 0 1 In lt Is lt 2 4 In expressed in Amps Resolution 1 A or 1 digit Accuracy 5 or 0 01 In Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T operation time at 10 Is 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 In Is x 100 Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5 to 20 s Characteristic times Operation time Pick up lt 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is for Is gt 0 3 In typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 Is for Is lt 0 3 In typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1
204. f Sepam units With distributed power supply 12V DC 24 V DC 5 320 m 1000 m 10 180m 750 m 20 130 m 450 m 25 125 m 375 m Fiber optic interface Fiber type Multimode glass Wavelength 820 nm infra red Type of connector ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Maximum length of fiber optic network Fiber diameter Numerical Attenuation Minimum optical Maximum fiber um aperture dBm km power available length NA dBm m 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 700 62 5 125 0 275 3 2 9 4 1800 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 2800 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 2600 Maximum length calculated with m minimum optical power available m maximum fiber attenuation m losses in 2 ST connectors 0 6 dBm m optical power margin 3 dBm according to IEC60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 pm fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1 8 km Dimensions i i ACE969TP 90 x LeS x 8 gt eNe sse 6 Gl US 144 gt 5B2 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Installation ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol interfaces Description ACE969 communication interfaces ACE969TP ACE969FO 1 Grounding earthing terminal using supplied braid 2 Power supply terminal block 3 RJ45 connector to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord 4 Green LED ACE969 energized 5 Red LED ACE969
205. function is used without the circuit breaker control function Cleared fault The recloser function has sucessfully reclosed Impulse type output Final trip The circuit breaker is definitively open after the reclosing cycles Impulse type output Recloser ready The recloser is ready to carry out the cycles Recloser in service The recloser is in service Recloser cycle 1 Cycle 1 in progress Recloser cycle 2 Cycle 2 in progress Recloser cycle 3 Cycle 3 in progress Recloser cycle 4 Cycle 4 in progress Reverse phase rotation The voltages measured are rotating in reverse MET148 1 fault MET 148 2 fault Hardware problem on an MET module module 1 or 2 or on an RTD Watchdog Logic inputs button Logic inputs 111 to 114 Monitoring of Sepam operation According to configuration Always on O4 if used If MES114 module is configured Logic inputs 121 to 126 Equations button V1 to V10 According to configuration Logical equation editor outputs If MES114 is configured 4 18 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Control and monitoring functions ES HE HE Ma e Cede Ghee a ite se Logical eguation editor 1j saj sr si PCRED301006EN June 2005 zl al al Logic equations Application This function may be used to configure simple logic functions by combining data received from the protection functions or logic inputs By using
206. function is initialized with the current values of the remote indication and logic input status without creating any events related to those data After the initialization phase event detection is activated It can only be interrupted by saturation of the internal event storage queue or by the presence of a major fault in Sepam Date and time Presentation An absolute date and time are generated internally by Sepam comprising the following information Year Month Day Hour minute millisecond The date and time format is standardized ref IEC 60870 5 4 Power failure protection The internal clock of Sepam series 40 is saved for 24 hours After a power outage that lasts for more than 24 hours the time must be reset The period over which Sepam data and time settings are maintained in the event of a power outage depends on the ambient temperature and the age of the Sepam unit Typical values m at 25 C 24 hours for 7 years 18 hours for 10 years 14 hours for 15 years m at40 C O 24 hours for 3 years O 16 hours for 10 years O 10 hours for 15 years Resetting the date and time The internal clock of Sepam series 40 may be time set in three different ways m by the remote monitoring and control system via the Modbus link m via the SFT2841 software tool General characteristics screen m via the display of Sepam units equipped with the advanced UMI The time tagged on events is encoded in 8 bytes as f
207. g o 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 1 mm 2 AWG 24 16 o stripped length 8 to 10 mm m with fitting o recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm o tube length 8 2 mm o stripped length 8 mm Wiring of the CCA622 and CCA627 connectors m ring lug connectors 6 35 mm 1 4 Characteristics of the 4 base unit relay outputs O1 O2 03 O4 m O1 and O2 are 2 control outputs used by the breaking device control function for o O1 breaking device tripping o O2 breaking device closing inhibition m O3 and O4 are indication outputs only O4 may be activated by the watchdog function 6 6 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Base unit Connection of current input Installation Ka VY a Q pe bo A 0 lt lt lt les NI 0 O al all elje QQQ f a 0 MIN im xN co SZ 1 J 0 j za 8 7 o alo Link to 5 remote optional 4 2 ET O01 modules ao Modbus o communication port 1 This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage 2 Accessory for bridging terminals 3 and 5 supplied with CCA626 connector PCRED301006EN June 2005 6 7 Installation Base unit Other phase current input con
208. g 0 1 s to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Voltage and power protection behavior Setting No action inhibition Protection 67 behavior Setting Non directional inhibition Protection 67N 67NC behavior Setting Non directional inhibition 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Switchgear diagnosis functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 CT supervision ANSI code 60 Operation The CT Current Transformer supervision function is used to supervise the complete phase current measurement chain m phase current sensors 1 A 5 A CTs or LPCTs m phase current sensor connection to Sepam m Sepam phase current analog inputs The function detects the loss of a phase current when the three phase currents are measured The function is inactive if only 2 phase current sensors are connected The CT fault information disappears automatically when the situation returns to normal i e as soon as the three phase currents are measured and have values greater than 10 of In In the event of the loss of a phase current the following protection functions may be inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping m 46 32P and 320 40 m 51N and 67N if 10 is calculated by the sum of the phase currents Block diagram MT11136 N gt 5 In phase 1 loss gt 5 In V s gt CT fault 110 lt angle 13 12 lt 130 13 phase 2 loss phase 3 loss Characteristics Ti
209. g 14 V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 VDC 120VAC threshold Input limit AtstateO z 19 VDC z 88 VDC z88VAC z176VDC z 176VAC voltage At state1 lt 6VDC lt 75 VDC s22VAC lt 137VDC lt 48VAC Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC AC 100 to 47 5 to 240 V AC Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking capacity Resistive 8 4A 0 7A 0 3A 8A load Load 6 2A 0 5A 0 2A L R lt 20 ms Load 4 1A 0 2A 0 1A L R lt 40 ms Load 5A cos gt 0 3 Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Voltage DC 24 48V DC 127V DC 220 V DC AC 100 to 47 5 to 240 V AC 63 Hz Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking capacity Load 2 1A 0 5A 0 15A L R lt 20 ms Load 1A cos g gt 0 3 Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE52153 DE51683 DE51685 Installation SBOSSSO9S0 4 ny4 12 V evi 125 24 8 113 12 ep 122 5 112 i wl 1 ep MES114 MES114E MES114F o an Raon so OS OF NA ek a V PCRED301006EN June 2005 MES114 modules Description M and K 3 removable lockable screw type connectors connectors for 4 relay outputs m O11 1 control relay output m O12 to O14 3 indication relay outputs V connectors for 4 independent logic inputs 111 to 114 O connectors for 6 logic inputs m 121 1 independent logic input m 22 to 126 5 common point logic inputs
210. g Description functions Sepam performs the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation m the main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the applications most freguently used They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs outputs have been assigned m the predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software which offers the following customization options o logic equation editor to adapt and complete predefined control and monitoring functions o creation of user messages for local display O customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays LEDs and display messages Operating principle The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3 phases m acquisition of input data o results of protection function processing o external logic data connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES120 input output module o remote control orders TC received via the communication link m actual logic processing of the control and monitoring function m utilization of the processing results o activation of output relays to trigger an actuator o information sent to the facility manager by message and or LED on the advanced UMI and SFT2841 software by remote indication TS via the communication link Logic outputs
211. gital technology guarantees the reproducibility of the performances announced m each of the Sepam functions has undergone full factory qualification m an internal self testing system provides continuous information on the state of the electronic components and the integrity of the functions e g automatic tests diagnose the level of component polarization voltages the continuity of the analog value acguisition chain non alteration of RAM memory absence of settings outside the tolerance range and thereby guarantees a high level of availability Sepam is therefore ready to operate without reguiring any additional gualification testing that concerns it directly 7 20 Principles and methods Sepam commissioning tests The preliminary Sepam commissining tests may be limited to a commissioning check i e m checking of compliance with BOMs and hardware installation diagrams and rules during a preliminary general check m checking of the compliance of the general settings and protection settings entered with the setting sheets m checking of current or voltage input connection by secondary injection tests m checking of logic input and output connection by simulation of input data and forcing of output status m validation of the complete protection chain possible customized logic functions included m checking of the connection of the optional MET148 2 and MSA141 modules The various checks are described further on General princi
212. gnosis cumulative breaking current trip circuit supervision operating time m diagnosis of the protection unit and additional modules continuous self testing watchdog Control and monitoring m circuit breaker program logic ready to use requiring no auxiliary relays or additional wiring m adaptation of control functions by a logic eguation editor um preprogrammed customizable alarm messages on messages on UMI User Machine Interface 2 levels of User Machine Interface UMI are available according to the user s needs E basic UMI an economical solution for installations that do not require local operation run via a remote monitoring and control system E fixed or remote advanced UMI a graphic LCD display and 9 key keypad are used to display the measurement and diagnosis values alarm and operating messages and provide access to protection and parameter setting values for installations that are operated locally Setting and operating software The SFT2841 PC software tool gives access to all the Sepam functions with all the facilities and convenience provided by a Windows type environment 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Sepam series 40 Selection table Protection ANSI code S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 Phase overcurrent 50 51 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Voltage restrained
213. gure 2 in which a lower Sepam hot curve would intersect the starting curve with U 0 9 Un The Es0 parameter is a setting that is used to solve these differences by lowering the Sepam cold curve without moving the hot curve In this example the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 s starting from the cold state The following equation is used to obtain the EsO value t 2 necessary 2 T Es0 l processed e 1 s processed Es2 b lp with t necessary tripping time necessary starting from a cold state I rocessed qUIPMent current 1 When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1 and the machine hot cold curves the use of the curves is recommended since they are more accurate 2 The charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve may be used or else the equation of the curve which is given on page 3 17 8 DE 3 19 DE50511 n o D paj a o o a O te 5 lt o MT10863 DE50512 Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples In numerical values the following is obtained Use of the additional setting group 400 sec When a motor rotor is locked or is turning very slowly its thermal behavior is different EsO 4 e 24x60sec 4 1 2 0 3035 31 from that with the rated load In such conditions the motor is damaged by overheating of the rotor or stator For high power motors rotor overheating is most By setting Es0 31 point 2 is m
214. hat are exchanged have the same structure Each message or frame contains 4 types of data slave number function code data zones CRC 16 check zone m slave number 1 byte this indicates the receiving Sepam 0 to FFh If it is egual to zero the reguest concerns all the slaves broadcasting and there is no reply message m function code 1 byte this is used to select a command read write bit word and to check that the reply is correct m data zones n bytes these zones contain the parameters relating to the function bit address word address bit value word value number of bits number of words m check zone 2 bytes this zone is used to detect transmission errors 5 3 PE50619 PE50620 Modbus communication be bm imer bee ce be mem te ee omi iu b mir oaza nana oaza ee IL gre rar r SFT2841 Sepam Configuration screen Le ie ee SFT2841 communication configuration window for ACE949 5 4 Configuring the communication interfaces Access to configuration parameters The Sepam communication interfaces are configured using SFT2841 software The configuration parameters can be accessed from the Communication configuration window in SFT2841 To access this window m open the Sepam configuration window in SFT2841 m check the box for ACE9xx communication interface m click zj the Communication configuration window appears m select the type of interface
215. he advanced UMI display unit by pressing the A key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 1 5 In Unit A or kA Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 In 5 if lt 0 3 In Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 A Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 In rated current set in the general settings 2 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Display of values 0 02 to 40 In Residual current Operation This operation gives the RMS value of the residual current 10 It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The residual current measured 10 and the residual current calculated by the sum of the phase currents lo may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range Connection to 3 phase CTs 0 1 to 1 5 Ind Connection to 1 CT with CSH30 interposing ring CT 0 1 to 1 5 Ind 3 Connection to core balance CT with ACE990 0 1 to 1 5 Ino Connection to CSH residual 2 A rating 0 2 to 3 A current sensor 5 A rating 0 5 to 7 5 A 20 A rating 2 to 30 A Unit A or kA Accuracy 2 1 typical at Ind 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 Ino 5 if lt 0
216. he curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 IsO The tripping time for l0 IsO values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions niky aik 3 A a a a a The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 IsO tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 IsO m if gt 20 Ino tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 InO operation based on lO input m if 10 gt 40 Ino 1 tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 InO operation based on sum of phase currents Block diagram 11 12 x 13 CSH core bal CT CT CSH30 core bal ACE990 pick up signal and to logic discrimination DE50372 time delayed output 10 gt Iso The choice between 10 measured and 10x calculated by the sum of
217. he user wishes to inhibit circuit breaker closing V_INHIBCLOSE P38 49T_1_10 OR P38 49T_2_10 OR P38 49T_3_10 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN June 2005 Contents Presentation Modbus protocol Configuring the communication interfaces Commissioning and diagnosis Data addresses and encoding Time tagging of events Access to remote settings Disturbance recording Reading Sepam identification 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 6 5 8 5 21 5 26 5 41 5 43 5 1 Modbus communication 5 2 Presentation General Modbus communication allows Sepam to be connected to a supervisor or any other device with a master Modbus communication channel Sepam is always a slave station Sepam is connected to a Modbus communication network via a communication interface There is a choice of two types of communication interface m Communication interfaces to connect Sepam to a single network o ACE949 2 for connection to a 2 wire RS 485 network o ACE959 for connection to a 4 wire RS 485 network o ACE937 for connection to a fiber optic star network m Communication interfaces to connect Sepam to two networks o ACE969TP for connection to one 2 wire RS 485 Modbus S LAN supervision communication network one 2 wire RS 485 E LAN engineering communication network o ACE969FO for connection to one fiber optic Modbus S LAN supervision communication network one 2 wire RS 485 E LAN engineering
218. however it should not B 4007 m tor koveyne be determined in the same way as that of the first relay The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the S eguivalent current leg exceeds the Is value set point current 9 100 o E Example 4 transformer with 2 ventilation modes pene Given the following data j starting at Un The rated current of a transformer with 2 ventilation modes is starting at 0 9 Un m b 200 A without forced ventilation ONAN mode the transformer s main gt operating rate m b 240 A with forced ventilation ONAF mode a temporary operating rate to have 20 more power available 1 1 2 Vb Setting of the basis current for ventilation operating rate 1 Ib 200 A to be set in Sepam general parameters Setting of the basis current for ventilation operating rate 2 Ib2 240 A to be set among the specific thermal overload protection settings Switching of thermal settings via logic input to be assigned to the switching of thermal settings function and to be connected to the transformer ventilation control unit The settings related to each ventilation operating rate Es set points time constants etc are to be determined according to the transformer characteristics provided by the manufacturer 3 20 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Cold curves for Es0 0 Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting ex
219. hronization via a logic input PCRED301006EN June 2005 Time tagging of events Synchronization cont d External synchronization via a logic input mode Sepam can be synchronized externally by means of a logic input 121 the MES114 module is required The synchronization pulse is determined by the rising edge of the logic input Sepam can adapt to all synchronization pulse periods from 10 to 60 s by 10 s steps The shorter the synchronization period the more accurate time tagging of status changes is The first time frame is used to initialize Sepam with the absolute date and time the following frames are used for the detection of any time changes The synchronization pulse is used to reset Sepam s internal clock In the initialization phase when Sepam is in non synchronous mode resetting is allowed within an amplitude of 4 seconds In the initialization phase the resetting process switching of Sepam into synchronous mode is based on a measurement of the difference between Sepam s current time and the nearest ten second period This measurement is taken at the time of the receipt of the synchronization pulse following the initialization time frame Resetting is allowed if the difference is less than or equal to 4 seconds in which case Sepam switches to synchronous mode As of that time after the switching to synchronous mode the resetting process is based on the measurement of a difference between Sepam s c
220. i Example of general characteristics screen 7 5 Use Not connected to Sepam mode Sepam parameter and protection setting The parameter and protection setting of a Sepam using SFT2841 consists of preparing the Sepam file containing all the characteristics that are specific to the application a file that is then downloaded into Sepam at the time of commissioning Operating mode m create a Sepam file for the type of Sepam to be set up the newly created file contains the Sepam factory set parameter and protection settings m modify the Sepam general settings and protection function settings all the data relating to the same function are grouped together in the same screen it is advisable to enter all the parameters and protection settings in the natural order of the screens proposed by the guided navigation mode Entry of parameter and protection settings m the parameter and protection setting input fields are suited to the type of value choice buttons numerical value input fields dialogue box Combo box m the user must Apply or Cancel the new values entered before going on to the following screen m the consistency of the new values applied is checked an explicit message identifies inconsistent values and specifies the authorized values values that have become inconsistent following a parameter modification are adjusted to the closest consistent value
221. ial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS 485 network Without requiring any flow control signals the ACE919 converters perform network polarization and impedance matching The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949 ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces There are 2 types of ACE919 converters m ACE919CC DC powered m ACE919CA AC powered Characteristics Weight Assembly 0 280 kg On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail Power supply 110to 220 V AC 24 to 48 V DC 20 410 47 to 63 Hz Protection by time delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating 1 A rating Galvanic isolation 2000 Vrms 50 Hz between power supply and frame and 1 min between power supply and interface supply Data format 11 bits 1 start 8 bits 1 parity 1 stop Transmission delay lt 100 ns Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces 12 V DC or 24 V DC Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12 distributed supply Operating temperature 5 C to 55 C 5 ns fast transient bursts 60255 22 4 4 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 1 kV common mode 0 5 kV differential mode 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode 1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255 22 1 1 2 50 us impulse wave 60255 5 8 SELE 6 3
222. il 25 C to 70 C Same characteristics as Sepam base units Standard Distributed power supply Consumption EIA 2 wire RS 485 differential External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode Number of Sepam Maximum length with Maximum length with units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply 5 320 m 1000 m 10 180 m 750 m 20 160 m 450 m 25 125 m 375 m Description and dimensions A and B Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 plug to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord Grounding earthing terminal 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Jumper for RS 485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Rc 150 Q to be set to m Mc if the module is not at one end of the RS 485 network default position m Rc if the module is at one end of the RS 485 network 3 Network cable clamps inner diameter of clamp 6 mm Connection m connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m connection of earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross section z 6 mm or cable with cross section 2 2 5 mm and length lt 200 mm equipped with a 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm m the interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing poin
223. ing Sepam has a large number of self tests that are carried out in the base unit and additional modules The purpose of the self tests is m to detect failures that may lead to nuisance tripping or the failure to trip when a fault occurs m to put Sepam in the fail safe position to avoid user errors m to notify the operator that a maintenance operation is required The Sepam diagnosis screen of the SFT2841 software provides access to data on the status of the base unit and optional modules Te e imme am mm dimer rae li td Bhen rimi sama er tamo re ere C iie vam nana z fae te _ raana bizm m vm fons re T ae rer r ee eee ee Sees ee Sepam Diagnosis screen 7 36 Maintenance Shutdown of the base unit in fail safe position The base unit goes into the fail safe position in the following conditions m detection of an internal failure by the self tests m sensor interface connector missing CCA630 or CCA670 m no connection of one of the 3 LPCT sensors to the CCA670 connectors L1 L2 and L3 m MES module configured but missing The fail safe position is conveyed by m ON indicator on BK indicator on the base unit steadily on relay O4 watchdog in fault position output relays dropped out all protection units inhibited display showing fault message A ey indicator on DSM303 module remote advanced UMI option flashing 01 Downgraded operation The base u
224. ing plate Connection Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current I0 input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam series 80 m to residual current lO input on connector terminals 15 and 14 shielding m to residual current PO input on connector terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended cable m sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid m minimum cable cross section 0 93 mm AWG 18 m resistance per unit length lt 100 mQ m m minimum dielectric strength 1000 V 700 Vrms It is essential for the CSH30 to be installed near Sepam Sepam CSH30 link less than 2 m Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not be more than 4 Q or 20 m maximum for 100 mQ m DE51679 6 14 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Installation CSH30 interposing ring CT Function The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers Characteristics _ Weight 0 2 kg Vertical assembly of CSH30 Horizontal assembly of Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail interposing ring CT CSH30 interposing ring CT In vertical or horizontal position Dimensions DE50066 Connection The CSH30
225. ircuit breaker is ready to carry out an Open Close Open cycle The maximum time addded to the dead time is adjustable Twait_max If at the end of the maximum waiting time the circuit breaker is still not ready the recloser is inhibited see example 4 5 Characteristics Reclosing cycles Setting Number of cycles 1to4 Activation of cycle 1 max l 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation max l0 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation directional max 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation directional max 10 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation V_TRIPCB output logic equation activation no activation Activation of cycles 2 3 and 4 max 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation max l0 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation directional max 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation directional max 10 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation V_TRIPCB output logic equation activation no activation Time delays Reclaim time 0 1 to 300 s Dead time cycle 1 0 1 to 300 s cycle 2 0 1 to 300 s cycle 3 0 1 to 300 s cycle 4 0 1 to 300 s Safety time until 79 ready 0 to 60 s Maximum additional dead time 0 1 to 60 s Twait max Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit 1 If a protection function that does not activate reclosing cycles leads to circuit breaker opening the recloser is inhibited 3 49 MT10555 MT10
226. irection O line 1 busbar 24 Group B types 1 and 2 characteristic angle 0 45 angle 1 lt 0 angle 2 15 angle 3 30 angle 4 45 angle 5 60 angle 6 90 angle Group B type 3 limit 1 0 to 359 25 Group B type 1 sector 2 76 sector 3 83 sector 4 86 sector Group B type 3 limit 2 0 to 359 26 Group B tripping curve 27 Group B types 1 and 2 IsO set point 0 1 A Group B type 3 IsO set point 0 01 A 28 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 29 Group B types 1 and 2 VsO Unp Group B type 3 Vso 0 1 Unp 30 Group B timer hold curve 8 31 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 32 Group B memory time 10 ms 33 Group B memory voltage Unp 34 Reserved 35 Reserved 36 Reserved 37 Reserved 5 38 8 DE PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication ANSI 79 Recloser Function number 1701 Access to remote settings Setting Data Format Unit 1 Activity OD 2 Number of cycles 1to4 3 Reclaim time 10 ms 4 Safety time until ready 10 ms 5 Dead time extension 6 Maximum waiting time 10 ms 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Cycle 1 activation mode 10 Cycle 1 dead time 10 ms 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Cycle 2 3 4 activation mode 14 Cycle 2 dead time 10 ms 15 Cycle 3 dead time 10 ms 16 Cycle 4 dead time 10 ms 17 Reserved 18 Reser
227. istributed voltage which means that the residual voltage is obtained outside Sepam by 3 VTs connected via their secondary circuits in an open delta arrangement or when applicable is not used for the protection function current test terminal box Checking of phase current and voltage input connection With single phase generator and voltages delivered by 2 VTs Procedure m connect the single phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test terminal boxes using the plugs provided according to the block diagram below Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box single phase enerator g A 8 PCRED301006EN June 2005 m turn the generator on m apply via the test box the voltage delivered at the V N terminals of the generator set to V3 2 times the rated secondary phase to phase voltage of the VTs i e V3 Uns 2 between terminals 1 3 of Sepam s voltage inputs m inject the generator current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs i e 1 A or 5 A and in phase with the V N voltage applied i e generator phase displacement a V N 0 to Sepam s phase 1 current input via the test box m use the SFT2841 software to check the following the value indicated for 11 phase current is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CT Inp the value indicated for V1 phase to neutral voltage is approximately equa
228. ivate the recloser o V CLOSECB circuit breaker closing by the circuit breaker control function Used to generate a circuit breaker close order based on a particular condition o V INHIBCLOSE inhibition of circuit breaker closing by the circuit breaker control function Used to add circuit breaker closing inhibition conditions o V FLAGREC data saved in disturbance recording Used to save a specific logical status in addition to those already present in disturbance recording Local variables Variables designed for intermediary calculations They are not available outside the logic equation editor They may appear on the left or right of the assignment sign There are 31 of them VL1 to VL31 Two constants are also predefined K 1 always equal to 1 and K 0 always equal to 0 4 20 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Control and monitoring Logic equations functions Details of protection inputs outputs The table below lists the input output data available for each protection function The SFT2841 software includes a data input assistance tool which may be used to quickly identify each data item m numbers less than 100 correspond to the protection outputs that may be used as equation input variables m numbers between 100 and 199 correspond to the protection inputs that may be used as equation output variables m numbers greater than 200 correspond to the recloser outputs that may be used as equation input variables Table of protec
229. k word Time tagging is carried out systematically The remote monitoring and control system provides a chronological display of the time tagged data Time tagging Sepam time tagging of events uses absolute time see section on date and time When an event is detected it is tagged with the absolute time given by Sepam s internal clock All the Sepam internal clocks must be synchronized so as to avoid drifts and all be the same thereby allowing inter Sepam chronological sorting Sepam has two mechanisms for managing its internal clock m time setting to initialize or modify the absolute time A special Modbus message called time message is used to time set each Sepam m synchronization to avoid Sepam internal clock drifts and ensure inter Sepam synchronization Synchronization may be carried out according to two principles m internal synchronization via the communication network without any additional wiring m external synchronization via a logic input with additional wiring At the time of commissioning the user sets the synchronization mode parameter PCRED301006EN June 2005 Time tagging of events Initialization of the time tagging function Each time the communication system is initialized energizing of Sepam the events are generated in the following order m appearance of data loss m appearance of incorrect time m appearance of not synchronous m disappearance of data loss The
230. l to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VT Vnp Unp V3 the value indicated for the phase displacement g1 V1 11 between the I1 current and V1 voltage is approximately equal to 0 m proceed in the same way to check the 12 V2 g2 V2 12 values apply the generator V N voltage set to V3 Uns 2 in parallel between terminals 1 3 and 2 3 of Sepam s voltage inputs via the test box inject an current set to 1 A or 5 A and in phase opposition with the V N voltage i e x V N 180 to Sepam s phase 2 current input via the test box obtain 12 Inp V2 Vnp Unp V3 and 92 0 m check the 13 V3 3 V3 13 values as well apply the generator V N voltage set to V3 Uns 2 between terminals 2 3 of Sepam s voltage inputs via the test box inject a current equal to 1 A or 5 A and in phase with the V N voltage i e x V N 0 to Sepam s phase 3 current input via the test box obtain 13 Inp V3 Vnp Unp v3 and 93 0 m turn the generator off 8 DE 7 27 Commissioning Description Check to be performed when phase currents are measured by LPCT type current sensors Phase current measurement by LPCT sensors m The 3 LPCT current sensors are connected via an RJ45 plug to the CCA670 connector which is to be mounted on the rear panel of Sepam identified as m The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam
231. lded twisted pair 1 shielded twisted pair Shielding Tinned copper braid coverage gt 65 Characteristic impedance 120 Q Gauge AWG 24 Resistance per unit length lt 100 Q km Capacitance between conductors lt 60 pF m Capacitance between conductor lt 100 pF m and shielding Maximum length 1300 m Fiber type Multimode glass Wavelength 820 nm infra red Type of connector ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Fiber optic Numerical Maximum Minimum optical Maximum diameter um aperture attenuation power available length of NA dBm km _ dBm fiber m 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 700 62 5 125 0 275 3 2 9 4 1800 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 2800 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 2600 8 Merlin Gerin 6 25 Installation PE50029 ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network connection interface DE51661 1 70 mm with CCA612 cord connected 2 wire S RS 485 network JB B A A Power supply 12 B B IA A 2 wire RS 485 network 6 26 ACE949 2 ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network interface Function The ACE949 2 interface performs 2 functions m electrical interface between Sepam and a 2 wire RS 485 communication network m main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord Characteristics Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0 1 kg On symmetrical DIN ra
232. le below specifies the tests to be carried out according to the type of measurement sensors and type of generator used and indicates the page on which each test is described Current sensors 3 CTs 3 CTs 1 core 3CTs 3 CTs 1 core balance CT balance CT Voltage sensors 3 VTs 3 VTs 2 phase VTs 2 phase VTs 1 residual VT 1 residual VT Three phase Page 7 24 Page 7 24 Page 7 25 Page 7 25 generator Page 7 29 Page 7 30 Page 7 31 Single phase Page 7 26 Page 7 26 Page 7 26 Page 7 26 generator Page 7 29 Page 7 30 Page 7 31 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Commissioning PCRED301006EN June 2005 Testing and metering equipment required Generators m dual sinusoidal AC current and voltage generator 50 or 60 Hz frequency according to the country current adjustable up to at least 5 Arms adjustable up to the rated secondary phase to phase voltage of the VTs adjustable relative phase displacement V three phase or single phase type m DC voltage generator adjustable from 48 to 250 V DC for adaptation to the voltage level of the logic input being tested Accessories m plug with cord to match the current test terminal box installed m plug with cord to match the voltage test terminal box installed m electric cord with clamps wire grip or touch probes Metering devices built into the generator or separate m ammeter 0 to 5 Arms m 1 voltmeter 0 to
233. lin Gerin 6 11 Installation 1 A or 5 ACT block and connection diagram The current transformer 1 A or 5 A secondary windings are connected to the CCA630 connector item B CCA630 connector The connector contains 3 interposing ring CTs with through primaries which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or 5 A circuits and Sepam The connector may be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does not open the CT secondary circuits CCA630 wiring m open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals The shields may be removed if necessary to make wiring easier If removed they must be replaced after wiring m remove the bridging strap if necessary The strap links terminals 1 2 and 3 m connect the wires using 4 mm ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits The connector accommodates wires with cross sections of 1 5 to 6 mm AWG 16 to AWG 10 m close the side shields m plug the connector into the 9 pin inlet on the rear panel item m tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws on the rear panel of Sepam 6 12 Current transformers 1 A 5 A al x H o le 3 o s lj gol 12 o SHE jj Y 914 o 3 o o 2 o 9 Noe 3 2 7018 5 e gle 8 o12 o s No CSH A A o 19 s 12 gt vot ene o Z O 15 di 2 is O4 O ina Moi
234. line end The residual current is the current measured at the Sepam 10 input The time delay may be definite time DT In choosing an IsO setting equal to zero the protection is equivalent to the neutral voltage displacement protection ANSI 59N IsO set point Tripping zone Block diagram CSH core bal CT2A ig CSH30 10 gt IsO a core bal CT ACE990 Lim 1 Lim 2 l time delayed T o output Lim 1 lt g0 lt Lim 2 s v1 V2 x pick up signal and to logic discrimination V3 VO gt VsO external m Definite time operation IsO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA DE50398 Definite time protection principle PCRED301006EN June 2005 Merlin Gerin 3 47 Protection functions 3 48 Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Characteristics Type 3 Angle at start of tripping zone Lim 7 Setting 0 to 359 Resolution PP Accuracy 3 Angle at end of tripping zone Lim 2 Setting 0 to 359 1 Resolution F Accuracy 3 Tripping direction Setting Busbar line IsO setting Setting 2 With CSH core balance CT 0 1 Ato 30 A 2 A rating With 1 A CT CSH30 0 05 In0 lt IsO lt 15 InO min 0 1 A sensible Ino 0 1 InCT With core balance CT 0 05 Ino lt IsO lt 15 Ino min 0 1 A ACE990 range 1 Resolution 0 1 A or 1 digit
235. logic operators AND OR XOR NOT and time delays new processing operations and indications may be added to the existing ones The logic functions produce outputs that may be used m in the matrix to control relay outputs light up LEDs or display new messages m in the protection functions to create new inhibition or reset conditions for example m in circuit breaker control to add cases of circuit breaker tripping closing or inhibition m in disturbance recording to record particular logic data i control logic outputs nou matrix S inputs BH gt O circuit breaker control gt signal lamps recloser 0 protection functions messages Phase fault i logic equations gt Logic function configuration Logical functions are entered in text format in the SFT2841 editor Each line includes a logic operation the result of which is assigned to a variable Example V1 P5051 2 3ORI12 The lines are executed seguentially every 14 ms Description of operations Operators m NOT logic inversion m OR logic OR m AND logic AND m XOR exclusive OR V1 XOR V2 is equivalent to V1 AND NOT V2 OR V2 AND NOT V1 m assignment of a result m start of a comment the characters on the right are not processed m the operations may be grouped between brackets Functions m x SR y z bistable with priority given to
236. loss 1 no data loss 0 status Sepam has two internal storage queues with a capacity of 64 events If one of the queues becomes saturated i e 63 events already present the data loss event is generated by Sepam in the 64 position The detection of events stops and the most recent events are lost PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN June 2005 Time tagging of events Description of event encoding An event is encoded in 8 words with the following structure Most significant byte Word 1 type of event Least significant byte 08 00 For remote indications internal data logic inputs Word 2 event address See bit adresses 1000 to 10BF Word 3 reserved 00 00 Word 4 falling edge disappearance or rising edge appearance 00 00 Falling edge 00 01 Rising edge Word 5 year 00 0 to 99 year Word 6 month day 1 to 12 month 1 to 31 day Word 7 hours minutes 0 to 23 hours 0 to 59 minutes Word 8 milliseconds 0 to 59999 8 DE 5 23 DE50477 Modbus communication master computer te sose network Architecture for internal synchronization via the communication network 5 24 Time tagging of events Synchronization Sepam accommodates two synchronization modes m internal via the network synchronization mode by the broadcasting of
237. lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Connection conditions Type of connection V1 V2 V3 U21 U21 U32 U21 VO U21 U32 VO Phase to neutral Yes No No No Yes operation Phase to phase Yes on U21 only Yes on U21 only Yes operation 3 6 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction check ANSI code 27D 47 Operation Positive sequence undervoltage The protection picks up when the positive sequence component Vd of a three phase voltage system drops below the Vsd set point with gt gt gt 22 Vd 1 3 V1 aV2 a V3 gt gt 22 Vd 1 3 U21 a U32 jer with V z 4 anda z e gt m it includes a definite time delay T m it allows drops in motor electrical torque to be detected Phase rotation direction This protection also allows the phase rotation direction to be detected The protection considers that the phase rotation direction is inverse when the positive sequence voltage is less than 10 of Unp and when the phase to phase voltage is greater than 80 of Unp Block diagram 5 Vd Vd lt Vsd 1o time delayed output pick up signal Vd lt 0 1 Un u21 U gt 0 8 Un message rotation or V1 Characteristics Vsd set point Setting 15 Unp to 60 Unp Accuracy 2 Pick up drop out ratio 103 2 5 Resolution 1 Time delay Se
238. m of 4 time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Events 1 zone Word address Access Modbus function enabled Exchange word 0040 Read write 3 6 16 Event n 1 0041 0048 Read 3 Event n 2 0049 0050 Read 3 Event n 3 0051 0058 Read 3 Event n 4 0059 0060 Read 3 See time tagging of events chapter for data format Events 2 zone The event zone is a table which contains a maximum of 4 time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Events 2 zone Word address Access Modbus function enabled Exchange word 0070 Read write 3 6 16 Event n 1 0071 0078 Read 3 Event n 2 0079 0080 Read 3 Event n 3 0081 0088 Read 3 Event n 4 0089 0090 Read 3 See time tagging of events chapter for data format PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 5 9 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Remote control zone The remote control zone is a table which contains the pre assigned remote control bits TC The zone may be read or written using the word functions or bit functions The use of remote control orders is discussed in detail on page 5 20 Remote control ord
239. m operator level used to access all the screens in read mode and does not reguire any passwords m protection setter level requires the entry of the first password key allows protection setting iS key m parameter setter level requires the entry of the second password key allows modification of the passwords general settings as well key Only general setters may modify the passwords The passwords have 4 digits SK b5 b gt 51 o gt SIN b gt gt 5iN ext Ooff jlon Trip z PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 7 13 Use D e The metering key is used to display the variables measured by Sepam O The diagnosis key provides access to diagnostic data on the breaking device and additional measurements to facilitate fault analysis key The alarms key is used to consult the 16 most recent alarms that have not yet been cleared 7 14 Advanced UMI White keys for current operation MT10283 MT11117 MT10287 XK 0 I1 162A rus I2 161A ms I3 163A ams I gt gt 51 l gt 51N lo gt gt 5IN ext on S amp S bsi e s oe ee 0 off lon Trip I gt gt 51 b gt 5iN a VIS on SX bot B JA EE JAM JAK E JA JAMO Ooff jlon Trip O lo FAULT a PCRED301006EN June 2005 Use key The reset key resets Sepam extinction of signal lamps and resetting of protection units after the disappearance of faults The alarm messages are
240. making the connection to the communication network m Modifying the configuration parameters during normal operation will not disturb Sepam but will reset the communication port 8 DEL 5 5 Modbus communication a aa et ee RANI tie ar SS ee Tapin ampan pu ee PE50623 a as eres Cane em pir riil a v po Daa imr Stal Kemba ri romeo eea Haiba i Vane i Poro i reli mo i SFT2841 Sepam series 40 diagnosis screen 5 6 Commissioning and diagnosis Installing the communication network Preliminary study The communication network must first be the subject of a technical study to determine the following according to the installation characteristics and constraints geography amount of information processed etc m the type of medium electrical or fiber optic m the number of Sepam units per network m the transmission speed m the ACE interfaces configuration m the Sepam parameter settings Sepam user manual The communication interfaces must be installed and connected in accordance with the instructions in the Installation chapter of this manual Preliminary checks The following preliminary checks must be made m check the CCA612 cord connection between the ACE interface and the Sepam base unit m check the ACE Modbus communication port connection m check the complete configuration of the ACE m for the ACE969 check the auxiliary power supply connection Checking
241. me delay Setting 0 15 s to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Inhibition of protection functions 46 32P 32Q 40 51N 67N Setting No action inhibition 8 DE 2 25 2 26 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Contents Setting ranges 3 3 Undervoltage 3 6 ANSI code 27 27S Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction check 3 7 ANSI code 27D 47 Remanent undervoltage 3 8 ANSI code 27R Directional active overpower 3 9 ANSI code 32P Directional reactive overpower 3 10 ANSI code 32Q 40 Phase undercurrent 3 11 ANSI code 37 Temperature monitoring 3 12 ANSI code 38 49T Negative sequence unbalance 3 13 ANSI code 46 Negative sequence overvoltage 3 15 ANSI code 47 Excessive starting time locked rotor 3 16 ANSI code 48 51LR 14 Thermal overload 3 17 ANSI code 49 RMS Phase overcurrent 3 26 ANSI code 50 51 Breaker failure 3 28 ANSI code 50BF Earth fault 3 30 ANSI code 50N 51N or 50G 51G Voltage restrained phase overcurrent 3 32 ANSI code 50V 51V Overvoltage 3 34 ANSI code 59 Neutral voltage displacement 3 35 ANSI code 59N Starts per hour 3 36 ANSI code 66 Directional phase overcurrent 3 37 ANSI code 67 Directional earth fault 3 41 ANSI code 67N 67NC Recloser 3 49 ANSI code 79 Overfrequency 3 52 ANSI code 81H Underfrequency 3 53 ANSI code 81L General 3 54 IDMT protection functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 3 1 3 2 8
242. me of tripping They are saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Tripping current Operation This function gives the RMS value of currents at the prospective time of the last trip m TRIPI1 phase 1 current m TRIPI2 phase 2 current m TRIPI3 phase 3 current It is based on measurement of the fundamental component This measurement is defined as the maximum RMS value measured during a 30 ms interval after the activation of the tripping contact on output O1 Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 40 In Unit A or kA Accuracy 45 1 digit Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1A 1 In rated current set in the general settings 8 EDITH 2 13 Network diagnosis Negative sequence unbalance functions Negative sequence unbalance Operation This function gives the negative sequence component T z li lb The negative sequence current is determined based on the phase currents m 3 phases gt 1 gt 2 gt gt li z 3 Xin a l24al3 2x with a e m 2 phases gt gt 2 li x 11 a l3 wl 2m with a e
243. minutes 1 In rated current set in the general settings 2 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Display of values 0 02 to 40 In 8 DE 2 5 Metering functions 2 6 Phase to phase voltage Phase to neutral voltage Phase to phase voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase to phase voltages according to voltage sensor connections m U21 voltage between phases 2 and 1 m U32 voltage between phases 3 and 2 m U13 voltage between phases 1 and 3 It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 06 to 1 2 Unp Unit V or kV Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 Unp 2 from 0 06 to 0 5 Unp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Un nominal rating set in the general settings 2 At Unp in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Phase to neutral voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase to neutral voltages m V1 phase 1 phase to neutral voltage m V2 phase 2 phase to neutral voltage m V3 phase 3 phase to neutral voltage It is based on measurement of
244. n for usual applications in the different earthing systems The shaded boxes represent default settings Isolated neutral Impedant neutral Compensated neutral IsO set point To be set according to To be set according to To be set according to network coordination network coordination network coordination study study study Characteristic angle 80 90 0 0 Time delay T To be set according to To be set according to To be set according to network coordination network coordination network coordination study study study Direction Line Line Line Vso setpoint 2 of Uns 2 of Uns 2 of Uns Sector N A 86 86 Memory time TOmem 0 0 200 ms Memory voltage 0 0 0 VOmem 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Characteristics Type 1 Characteristic angle 60 Setting 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Accuracy 3 Tripping direction Setting Busbar line IsO set point Setting 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 Ind expressed in Amps With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2 A s IsO lt 30A 5 A rating 0 5 A lt Is0 lt 75A 20 A rating 2 A lt Is0 lt 300 A TC CSH30 0 1 Ino lt IsO lt 15 InO min 0 1 A Core balance CT with 0 1 In0 lt IsO lt 15 InO ACE990 Resolution 0 1 A or 1 digit Accuracy at 0 180 60 5 or 0 01 Ino Drop out pick up ratio Vs0 set point gt 89 or gt
245. nd consistent with the general characteristics by default in particular rated current and voltage In and Un m tripping behavior latching 50 51 50N 51N 50V 51V 67 67N 46 32P 32Q 40 48 51LR 14 27D 38 49T 49RMS participation in circuit breaker control 50 51 50N 51N 50V 51V 67 67N 46 32P 320 40 48 51LR 14 27D 49RMS 38 49T 37 m disturbance recording triggering with Control matrix m activation of signal lamps according to front panel markings m watchdog on output O4 m disturbance recording triggering upon activation of pick up signal PCRED301006EN June 2005 HA Merlin Gerin 7 19 Commissioning Protection relay testing Protection relays are tested prior to commissioning with the dual aim of maximizing availability and minimizing the risk of malfunctioning of the assembly being commissioned The problem consists of defining the consistency of the appropriate tests keeping in mind that the relay is always involved as the main link in the protection chain Therefore protection relays based on electromechanical and static technologies the performances of which are not totally reproducible must be systematically submitted to detailed testing not only to qualify relay commissioning but also to check that they actually are in good operating order and maintain the required level of performance The Sepam concept makes it possible to do away with such testing since m the use of di
246. nd with locked rotors This second set of parameters is taken into account when the current is greater than an adjustable set point Is Accounting for negative seguence current In the case of motors with coiled rotors the presence of a negative seguence component increases the heat rise in the motor The negative seguence component of the current is taken into account in the protection by the eguation leq JIph aK li in which Iph is the greatest phase current li is the negative seguence component of the current K is an adjustable factor K may have the following values 0 2 25 4 5 9 For an asynchronous motor K is determined as follows 2 Cd 1 1 in which Cn Cd rated torgue and starting torgue l Cn idi lb Id basis current and starting current g E g rated slip Learning of the cooling time constant T2 The cooling time constant T2 may be learnt according to the temperatures measured in the equipment by temperature sensors connected to the MET148 2 module T2 is calculated every time that the equipment runs for a sufficient time followed by a shutdown I lt 0 1lb and temperature stabilization For motors and generators T2 is calculated according to the temperatures measured on the stator by RTDs 1 2 and 3 For transformers T2 is calculated according to the temperatures measured on the primary winding by RTDs 1 3 and 5 For better accuracy it is advisable to measure the ambient temperature with RTD 8 If in th
247. ne or Ethernet This network forms the E LAN engineering network The connection window allows configuration of the Sepam network and provides access to the parameter and protection setting files of the Sepam units on the network To open the connection window click on the icon See Configuration of a Sepam network for details of how to configure the E LAN engineering network from the connection window 8 DE 7 3 Use All the setting and operating functions are available on the screen of a PC equipped with the SFT2841 software tool and connected to the PC connection on the front panel of Sepam run in a Windows 2 V98 or NT environment All the data used for the same task are grouped together in the same screen to facilitate operation Menus and icons are used for fast direct access to the required information Current operation m display of all metering and operation data m display of alarm messages with the time of appearance date hour mn s ms m display of diagnosis data such as tripping current number of switchgear operations and cumulative breaking current m display of all the protection and parameter settings m display of the logic status of inputs outputs and signal lamps The SFT2841 software is the solution suited to occasional local operation for demanding personnel who require fast access to all the information Parameter and protection setting V m display and setting of all the par
248. nection schemes L1 JL2 JL3 DE52170 CCA630 DES52171 CCA630 CCA670 DE51826 6 8 Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs to the CCA630 connector The measurement of phase currents 1 and 3 is sufficient to ensure all the current based protection functions This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer LPCT type sensors to the CCA670 connector The connection of just one or two sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to switch to the fallback position The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current The In parameter primary rated current measured by an LPCT is to be chosen from the following values in Amps 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 Parameter to be set using the advanced UMI and the SFT2841 software tool to be completed by hardware setting of the microswitches on the CCA670 connector 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE51827 DE52067 DE51830 Installation Base unit Other residual current input connection schemes Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents 11 12 and 13 measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT
249. nication Data addresses and encoding Synchronization zone The synchronization zone is a table which contains the absolute date and time for the time tagging function Time messages should be written in a single block containing 4 words using function 16 write word Messages can be read word by word or by groups of words using function 3 Synchronization zone Word address Access Modbus function enabled Binary time year 0002 Read write 3 16 Binary time months days 0003 Read 3 Binary time hours minutes 0004 Read 3 Binary time milliseconds 0005 Read 3 See time tagging of events chapter for data format Identification zone The identification zone contains system type information pertaining to the identification of the Sepam equipment Some of the information in the identification zone is also found in the configuration zone at the address 02CCh Identification zone Word address Access Modbus function Format Value enabled Manufacturer identification 0006 R 3 0100 Equipment identification 0007 R 3 0 Marking equipment type 0008 R 3 Idem 02E2 Modbus version 0009 R 3 Not managed 0 Application version 000A B R 3 1 Sepam check word 000C R 3 Idem 0100 Extension word 000D R 3 Not managed 0 Command 000E R W 3 16 Not managed Init to 0 Extension address 000F R 3 02CC 1 MSB word 2 major index LSB word 2 minor index Events 1 zone The event zone is a table which contains a maximu
250. nit is in working order all the protection functions activated are operational and indicates that one of the optional modules such as DSM303 MET148 2 or MSA141 is faulty or else that a module is configured but not connected According to the model this operating mode is conveyed by m Sepam with integrated advanced UMI MD base o ON indicator on O RK indicator on the base unit flashing including when the display is out of order off O J indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on The display shows a partial fault message and indicates the type of fault by a code o code 1 inter module link fault code 3 MET module unavailable code 4 MSA module unavailable Sepam with remote advanced UMI MX base DSM303 ON indicator on g indicator on the base unit flashing indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on o the display indicates the type of fault by a code same as above Special case of faulty DSM303 O ON indicator on O RK indicator on base unit flashing O BK indicator on DSM steadily on o display off This Sepam operating mode is also transmitted via the communication link O O OOMO RTD fault Each temperature monitoring function when activated detects whether the RTD associated with the MET148 2 module is short circuited or disconnected When this is the case the alarm message RTD FAULT is generated Since this alarm is common to the 8 functions the identification of the faulty RTD or RTDs is obt
251. not erased Sepam resetting must be confirmed key When an alarm is present on the Sepam display the clear key is used to return to the screen that was present prior to the appearance of the alarm or to a less recent unacknowledged alarm Sepam is not reset In the metering or diagnosis or alarm menus the clear key may be used to reset the average currents peak demand currents running hours counter and alarm stack when they are shown on the display Press the lamp test key for 5 seconds to start up a LED and display test sequence When an alarm is present the lamp test key is disabled PCRED301006EN June 2005 Advanced UMI White keys for current operation MT10301 MT10284 MT10283 on J b51 2001 10 06 12 40 50 PHASE FAULT 1A A Phase 1 I gt gt 51 IM IV ext JOoff lon Trip 1max 180A I2max 181A I2max 180A reset 1 2 I3 162A ans 161A ans 163A ans paj o 7 15 Use Advanced UMI Blue keys for parameter and protection setting e zun na eR eae nei The status key is used to display and enter the Sepam general settings They define the protected equipment characteristics and the different optional modules MT10810 General settings language 4rfrequency English O 50Hz O French O 60 Hz O Dm The protection key is used to display set and enable or di
252. ns v3 3 external VT Uns 3 18 Type of cubicle 0 incomer 1 feeder 19 Increment active power 0 1 kW h 20 Increment reactive power 0 1 kvar h 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication Protection settings They are organized according to increasing ANSI codes ANSI 27 27S Undervoltage Function number 10xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Latching Access to remote settings Format Unit CB control Activity Reserved Reserved O 4 R j N Voltage mode 0 phase to neutral 1 phase to phase 7 Us or Vs set point Unp or Vnp 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved ANSI 27D Positive sequence undervoltage Function number 08xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity Reserved Reserved Vsd set point Tripping time delay Reserved Reserved Reserved 0J NIAJ A wo N a jo Reserved ANSI 27R Remanent undervoltage Function number 0901 Setting Data Latching Format Unit Reserved Activity Reserved Reserved Us set point Tripping time delay Reserved Reserved Reserved ojoj NIJA A wo mM ajo Reserved ANSI 32P Active overpower
253. nt unit 1 21 Time delayed directional phase overcurrent unit 1 22 Instantaneous directional phase overcurrent unit 2 23 Time delayed directional phase overcurrent unit 2 24 V_TRIPCB logic equation The bit status is encoded as follows 0 No activation by the protection function 1 Activation by the protection function PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 5 29 Modbus communication 5 30 Access to remote settings General settings read only Function number 3002 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Rated frequency 0 50 Hz 1 60 Hz 2 Remote setting enabled 1 disabled 3 Working language 0 English 1 other 4 Active group of settings 0 Group A 1 Group B 3 Choice by 113 4 Choice by remote control 5 Setting mode 0 TMS 1 l ls 6 Phase CT rating 0 5A 1 1A 2 LPCT 7 Number of phase CTs 0 3CTs 1 2CTs 8 Rated current In A 9 Basic current Ib A 10 Residual current determination mode 0 None 1 2ACSH 2 20ACSH 3 CSH 1ACT 4 CSH 5ACT 5 ACE990 Range 1 6 ACE990 Range 2 7 5ACSH 8 CSH sensitive 1 A CT 9 CSH sensitive 5 A CT 11 Rated residual current Ino A 12 Integration period 0 lt 5 mn 1 lt 10 mn 2 15 mn 3 30 mn 4 lt 60 mn 13 Reserved 14 Rated primary voltage Unp V 15 Rated secondary voltage Uns 0 100V 1 110V 2 115V 3 120V 4 200V 5 230V 16 VT wiring 0 3V 1 2U 2 1U 17 Residual voltage mode 0 None1 23V 2 external VT U
254. ntenance 7 2 7 3 7 3 7 4 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 12 7 12 7 13 7 13 7 14 7 16 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 24 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 36 7A Use 7 2 User Machine Interfaces Sepam User Machine Interfaces Two different levels of user machine interface UMI are offered on the front panel of Sepam m basic UMI with signal lamps for installations operated via a remote system with no need for local operation m advanced UMI with keypad and graphic LCD display giving access to all the information necessary for local operation and Sepam parameter setting SFT2841 setting and operating software The UMI on the front panel of Sepam may be completed by the SFT2841 PC software tool which may be used for all Sepam parameter setting local operation and customization functions The SFT2841 setting and operating software is supplied on CD ROM along with the SFT2826 program for recovering disturbance recording files the interactive introduction to the Sepam range and all the Sepam documentation in PDF The CCA783 PC connecting cord to be ordered separately connects the PC to the port on the Sepam front panel so that the SFT2841 package can be used in point to point connected mode PE50336 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50426 DE52069 DE52241 Use SET 2841 Salga Emh lekaoome to SFT 241 pour epam Oona dari Solan Da yu raed fa
255. o H2 restraint The tripping curve setting is 0 definite time 1 IDMT Setting of latching and CB control 0 No 1 Yes Tripping curve for negative sequence undercurrent 0 definite 9 IEC VIT B 12 IEEE Very inverse 7 lt IECSIT A 10 IEC EIT C 13 IEEE Extr inverse 8 IEC LTI B 11 IEEE Mod inverse 17 Schneider specific The activation of each of the cycles is encoded as follows Correspondence between bit position protection according to the table below Bit Activation by 0 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 1 1 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 1 2 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 2 3 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 2 4 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 3 5 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 3 6 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 4 7 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 4 8 Instantaneous earth fault unit 1 9 Time delayed earth fault unit 1 10 Instantaneous earth fault unit 2 11 Time delayed earth fault unit 2 12 Instantaneous earth fault unit 3 13 Time delayed earth fault unit 3 14 Instantaneous earth fault unit 4 15 Time delayed earth fault unit 4 16 Instantaneous directional earth fault unit 1 17 Time delayed directional earth fault unit 1 18 Instantaneous directional earth fault unit 2 19 Time delayed directional earth fault unit 2 20 Instantaneous directional phase overcurre
256. o be transferred function 16 in 4 words starting at the address 2200h It should be noted that requesting a new record amounts to stopping the transfers that are in progress This is not the case for an identification zone transfer request 2200h 2400h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BOg BO8 BO7 BO6 BO5 B04 BOS B02 BO1 BOO o O O O O O O 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y o O O O M M M M O O O D D D D D O O O H H H H H Oo O mn mn mn mn mn mn ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms MS MS ms MS Y 1 byte for years varies from 0 to 99 years The remote monitoring and control system must ensure that the year 00 is later than 99 M 1 byte for months varies from 1 to 12 D 1 byte for days varies from 1 to 31 H 1 byte for hours varies from 0 to 23 mn 1 byte for minutes varies from 0 to 59 ms 2 bytes for milliseconds varies from 0 to 59999 Reply frame Reading of each portion of configuration and data file records by a 125 word read frame function 3 starting at the address 2300h 2300h 2500h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 B08 B07 BOG BOS B04 BOS B02 BO1 BOO Number of usable bytes Exenange numbar in the data zone Reading should always begin with the first word in the address zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address
257. o jo 4 98 o o Min 126 lt 10 o 2 je oe 2 jo gt 114 26 3 2 z o a 124448 o o ls 2 IS I gt ns 3447 o o 4 yo o 122446 o o o 5 5s e 2 I o a gt m Lile loj s o o oli 2 o a o p gt MmRi lt EJ 3 Tel a MT10464 Sepam current inputs 1 Bridging strap supplied with the CCA630 ie MT10318 7 le ii e a 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE50564 Installation LPCT sensor block and connection diagram The 3 LPCT current transformers are connected to the CCA670 connector mounted in the rear panel of Sepam item B The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into the failsafe position CCA670 connector parameter setting The CCA670 connector should be calibrated at the time of Sepam commissioning according to the following instructions m use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the LPCT settings zone the shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1 L2 L3 m onthe L1 block set the microswitch that corresponds to the selected rated current to 1 2 ratings possible for each position o the rated current should be the same as the one set in Sepam General characteristics menu via the SFT2841 software tool Current sensors screen with advanced UMI o leave the 7 other microswitches set to 0 m set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the s
258. o scroll and accept the values displayed lamp test key switching on sequence of all the signal lamps 7 12 8 Merlin Gerin _ PCRED301006EN June 2005 Use Advanced UMI Access to data Access to measurements and Example measurement loop parameters The measurements and parameters may be accessed A energizing using the metering diagnosis status and protection 8 of Sepam Metering menu keys They are arranged in a series of screens as current choice shown in the diagram opposite co m the data are split up by category in 4 menus associated with the following 4 keys o key measurements MEJE ba numerical values choice current voltage freguency power energy o 2 key switchgear diagnosis and additional measurements choice diagnosis tripping contexts x5 o s key general settings choice general modules I U sensors CT VT supervision program logic I O test O Q key protection settings I rms Metering bar graphs choice phase residual I directional I voltage Overcurrent frequency power machine recloser J m when the user presses a key the system moves on amp to the next screen in the loop When a screen includes more than 4 lines the user moves about in the screen y clear via the cursor keys g Average current 10 bar graph v l0x gt bar graph Protection and parameter setting modes There are 3 levels of use
259. of link selected direct serial link link via Ethernet TCP IP link via telephone modem Hirek cemin Configuration windows for the communication network according to the type of link direct serial link link via telephone modem PSTN or link via Ethernet TCP IP PCRED301006EN June 2005 HA Merlin Gerin 7 7 PE50588 PE50589 Use Configuration window for the serial link communication network Configuration window for the Ethernet TCP IP communication network 7 8 SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Direct serial link The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 or fiber optic multidrop network Depending on the serial link interfaces available on the PC the PC itself will be connected either directly to the RS 485 network or fiber optic HUB or via an RS 232 RS 485 converter or fiber optic converter The communication parameters to be defined are m port communication port used on the PC m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m parity None Even or Odd m handshake None RTS or RTS CTS m time out from 100 to 3000 ms m number of retries from 1 to 6 Link via TCP IP Ethernet The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 multidrop network over an Ethernet Modbus TCP IP gateway for example EGX gateway Configuration of the Modbus TCP IP gateway See the setup manual for the gateway used In general the gateway should
260. of passwords Only the parameter setting qualification level 2 keys or the SFT2841 allow modification of the passwords Passwords are modified in the general settings screen N key Loss of passwords If the factory set passwords have been modified and the latest passwords entered have been irretrievably lost by the user please contact your local after sales service representative Entry of parameters or settings Principle applicable to all Sepam screens example of phase overcurrent protection m enter the password H m access the corresponding screen by successively pressing the key m move the cursor by pressing the w key for access to the desired field e g curve m press the amp key to confirm the choice then select the type of curve by pressing the y or 4 key and confirm by pressing the key E press the Y key to reach the following fields up to the apply box Press the amp key to confirm the setting Entry of numerical values e g current threshold value m position the cursor on the required field using the a keys and confirm the choice by pressing the amp key gt m select the first digit to be entered and set the value by pressing the a v keys choice of 0 9 AI m press the ici key to confirm the choice and go on to the following digit The values are entered with 3 significant digits and a period The unit e g A or kA is chosen using the last digit m pres
261. ollows b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08 b07 b06 b05 b04 b03 b02 b01 b00 word 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o0 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y wordi 0 0 0 0 M M M M 0 0 0 D D D D D word2 0 0 0 H H H H H 0 0 mn mn mn mn mn mn word3 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms word 4 Y 1 byte for years varies from 0 to 99 years The remote monitoring and control system must ensure that the year 00 is greater than 99 M 1 byte for months varies from 1 to 12 D 1 byte for days varies from 1 to 31 H 1 byte for hours varies from 0 to 23 mn 1 byte for minutes varies from 0 to 59 ms 2 bytes for milliseconds varies from 0 to 59999 These data are encoded in binary format Sepam is time set via the write word function function 16 at the address 0002 with a mandatory 4 word time message The bits set to 0 in the description above correspond to format fields which are not used in and not managed by Sepam Since these bits can be transmitted to Sepam with random values Sepam performs the necessary disabling Sepam does not check the consistency or validity of the date and time received Synchronization clock A synchronization clock is required to set the Sepam date and time Schneider Electric has tested the following equipment Gorgy Timing ref RT300 equipped with the M540 module 5 21 Modbus communication Reading of events Sepam provides the master or masters with two event tables The master reads the event table
262. olution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic time Overshoot time lt 20ms Taking into account of circuit breaker position Setting With without 8 DEL 3 29 DE50398 Protection functions Description The earth fault protection function comprises 2 groups of four units called Group A and Group B respectively The mode of switching from one group to the other may be determined by parameter setting m by remote control TC3 TC4 m by logic input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B or by forcing the use of the group Operation The earth fault protection function is single pole It picks up if the earth fault current reaches the operation set point It is time delayed The time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves opposite The protection function includes harmonic 2 restraint which provides greater stability when transformers are energized The restraint disables tripping regardless of the fundamental current The restraint may be inhibited by parameter setting Definite time protection IsO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay Definite time protection principle IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards gt 20 10 Is0 IDMT protection principle 3 30 Earth fault ANSI code 50N 51N or 50G 51G The IsO setting is the vertical asymptote of t
263. on AT command Transmission in buffered mode without error correction INO forces amp Q6 Data compression deactivated CO Line quality monitoring deactivated EO DTR signal assumed to be permanently off allows the modem amp DO connection to be established automatically on an incoming call CD signal off when carrier is present amp C1 All reports made to Sepam blocked Qi Character echo suppression EO No flow control amp KO 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50592 Use Sepam network connected to SFT2841 Access to parameters and settings for a Sepam series 80 connected to a communication network PCRED301006EN June 2005 SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Identification of Sepam units connected to the communication network The Sepam units connected to the communication network are identified by their Modbus address These addresses may be configured in either of the following ways m manually one by one the Add button is used to define a new Sepam device it is allocated a default Modbus address the Edit button is used to modify the Modbus address if necessary the Delete button removes a device from the configuration m automatically by running an automatic search of the Sepam units connected the Automatic search Stop search button starts or interrupts the search when SFT2841 recognizes a Sepam unit its Modbus address and type are shown on screen when
264. on Thermal capacity used assistance functions Cooling time constant Thermal capacity used Operation The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal protection function The thermal capacity used is related to the load The thermal capacity used measurement is given as a percentage of the rated thermal capacity Saving of thermal capacity used The thermal capacity used is saved in the event of a Sepam power cut The saved value is used again after a Sepam power outage Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the D key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 800 Unit Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical Cooling time constant Operation The cooling time constant T2 of the equipment being monitored transformer motor or generator is estimated by the thermal overload protection function It is calculated each time the equipment operates for a sufficiently long period followed by a shutdown I lt 0 1 Ib and temperature stabilization phase The calculation is based on the temperature measured by RTDs 1 2 and 3 stator sensors for motors and generators or by RTDs 1 3 and 5 primary winding sensors for transformers For greater accuracy it is advisable for the ambient temperatu
265. one RTS or RTS CTS m time out from 100 to 3000 ms Communication via modem and telephone network is slowed considerably because of the transit time through the modems A time out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most 38400 baud installations In some cases the poor quality of the telephone network may require a slower speed 9600 or 4800 bauds The time out value should then be increased 2 to 3 seconds m number of retries from 1 to 6 Note the speed and parity of the calling modem must be configured under Windows with the same values as for SFT2841 8 EDITH 7 9 PE50590 Use Configuration window for the communication network via telephone modem 7 10 SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Configuration of called modem The modem on the Sepam side is the called modem It must first be configured either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual Modem RS 485 interface In general the configuration parameters for the modem s RS 485 interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m character format 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Telephone network interface Modern modems offer sophisticated features such as che
266. one direction or the other supplied or absorbed is greater than the Ps set point It includes a definite time delay T It is based on the two wattmeter method The function is only enabled if the following condition is met P z 3 1 Q which provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event of short circuits The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or incomer parameter iaccording to the convention m for the feeder circuit x MT11183 flow direction m for the incomer circuit flow direction MT11184 power exported by the busbar is positive power supplied to the busbar is negative power supplied to the busbar is positive power exported by the busbar is negative This protection function operates for V1V2V3 U21 U32 and U21 U32 VO connections Block diagram H U21 overpower reverse power 8 choice of time delayed direction output 13 pick up output U32 Characteristics Tripping direction Setting overpower reverse power Ps set point Setting 1 Sn to 120 Sn Resolution 0 1 kW Accuracy 2 0 3 Sn for Ps between 1 Sn and 5 Sn 5 for Ps between 5 Sn and 40 Sn 3 for Ps between 40 Sn and 120 Sn Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Min return variance 0 004 Sn Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 2 or f
267. ons Cold curves for Es0 0 Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples ib 480 5 00 550 6 00 6 50 7 00 7 50 8 00 850 9 00 9 50 10 00 12 50 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 50 0 0219 0 0202 0 0167 0 0140 0 0119 0 0103 0 0089 0 0078 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0050 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 55 0 0242 0 0222 0 0183 0 0154 0 0131 0 0113 0 0098 0 0086 0 0076 0 0068 0 0061 0 0055 0 0035 0 0024 0 0018 0 0014 60 0 0264 0 0243 0 0200 0 0168 0 0143 0 0123 0 0107 0 0094 0 0083 0 0074 0 0067 0 0060 0 0038 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 65 0 0286 0 0263 0 0217 0 0182 0 0155 0 0134 0 0116 0 0102 0 0090 0 0081 0 0072 0 0065 0 0042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 70 0 0309 0 0284 0 0234 0 0196 0 0167 0 0144 0 0125 0 0110 0 0097 0 0087 0 0078 0 0070 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 75 0 0331 0 0305 0 0251 0 0211 0 0179 0 0154 0 0134 0 0118 0 0104 0 0093 0 0083 0 0075 0 0048 0 0033 0 0025 0 0019 80 0 0353 0 0325 0 0268 0 0225 0 0191 0 0165 0 0143 0 0126 0 0111 0 0099 0 0089 0 0080 0 0051 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 85 0 0376 0 0346 0 0285 0 0239 0 0203 0 0175 0 0152 0 0134 0 0118 0 0105 0 0095 0 0085 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 90 0 0398 0 0367 0 0302 0 0253 0 0215 0 0185 0 0161 0 0142 0 0125 0 0112 0 0100 0 0090 0 0058 0 0040 0 0029 0 0023 95 0 0421 0 0387 0 0319 0 0267 0 0227 0 0196 0 0170 0 0150 0 0132 0 0118 0 0106 0 0095 0 0061 0 0042 0 0031 0 0024 100 0 0444 0 0408 0 0336 0 0282 0 0240 0 0206 0 0179 0 015
268. out The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key in C or in F m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Range 30 C to 200 C or 22 F to 392 F Resolution 1 C or 1 F Accuracy 1 1 C from 20 to 140 C 2 C from 30 to 20 C 2 C from 140 to 200 C Refresh interval 5 seconds typical Accuracy derating according to wiring see chapter Installation of MET148 2 module page 6 21 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT10180 Network diagnosis functions lA TRIPI1 TO Tripping current TRIPI1 acquisition PCRED301006EN June 2005 gt t Tripping context Tripping current Tripping context Operation This function gives the values of physical units at the time of tripping to enable analysis of the cause of the fault Values available on the advanced UMI m tripping currents m residual currents based on sum of phase currents and measured on l0 input m phase to phase voltages m residual voltage m frequency m active power m reactive power The SFT2841 software may be used to obtain the following in addition to the values available on the advanced UMI m phase to neutral voltages m negative sequence voltage m positive seguence voltage The values for the last five trips are stored with the date and ti
269. oved downward to often a limiting factor obtain a shorter tripping time that is compatible with the The thermal overload parameters chosen for operation with a low overload are no motor s thermal resistance when cold see Figure 3 longer valid Please note A setting EsO 100 therefore means In order to protect the motor in this case excessive starting time protection may be that the hot and cold curves are the same used Nevertheless motor manufacturers provide the thermal resistance curves when the Figure 2 hot cold curves not compatible with the rotor is locked for different voltages at the time of starting motor s thermal resistance v Figure 4 Locked rotor thermal resistance A motor running locked rotor m 513 motor cold curve 2 400 2 motor hot curve v 2 o nuje N 1 Fi 100 Sepam hot curve E o E S Re v lt starting at Un starting at 0 9 Un 1 05 2 Mib gt Wb Figure 3 hot cold curves compatible with the O thermal resistance motor running motor s thermal resistance via the setting of an S ka dea sa Kan motor stopped initial heat rise EsO D Rini a A starting at 80 Un starting at 100 Un adjusted Sepam cold curve In order to take these curves into account the second thermal overload relay may be used Sepam hot curve 4 motor cold curve A PE gt The time constant in this case is in theory the shortest one
270. overcurrent 50V 51V 1 Earth fault Sensitive earth fault 50N 51N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 50G 51G Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Negative sequence unbalance 46 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Directional phase overcurrent 67 2 2 Directional earth fault 67N 67NC 2 2 2 2 Directional active overpower 32P 1 1 1 1 Directional reactive overpower 32Q 40 1 1 Thermal overload 49RMS 2 2 2 2 Phase undercurrent 37 1 Excessive starting time locked rotor 48 51LR 14 1 Starts per hour 66 1 Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 Remanent undervoltage 27R q Undervoltage 3 27 27S 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Overvoltage 59 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Negative sequence overvoltage 47 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Recloser 4 cycles 79 o o o Temperature monitoring 8 or 16 RTDs 38 49T o o o o Thermostat Buchholz 26 63 o o Metering Phase current 11 12 I3 RMS residual current 10 a a a a a a tT Demand current I1 12 13 peak demand current IM1 IM2 IM3 a a a a a a a Voltage U21 U32 U13 V1 V2 V3 residual voltage VO a a R a a a Positive sequence voltage Vd rotation direction u Negative seguence voltage Vi directe Vd sens de rotation tension inverse Vi Freguency um um un um a um u Active reactive and apparent power P O S 5 E E E mu E a Peak demand power PM QM power factor Calculated active and reactive energy W h var h Active and reactive energy by pulse coun
271. per used to select module number to be set to m MET1 1st MET148 2 module to measure temperatures T1 to T8 default position m MET2 2nd MET148 2 module to measure temperatures T9 to T16 for Sepam series 40 and series 80 only Connection Connection of the earthing terminal By tinned copper braid with cross section z 6 mm or cable with cross section z 2 5 mm and length lt 200 mm equipped with a 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torgue 2 2 Nm Connection of RTDs to screw type connectors m 1 wire with cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm z AWG 24 12 m or 2 wires with cross section 0 2 to 1 mm z AWG 24 16 Recommended cross sections according to distance mupto100m 21mm AWG 16 m up to 300 m 1 5 mm AWG 14 m up to 1 km 2 5 mm AWG 12 Maximum distance between sensor and module 1 km Wiring precautions m it is preferable to use shielded cables The use of unshielded cables may cause measurement errors which vary in degree on the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance m only connect the shielding at the MET148 2 end in the shortest manner possible to the corresponding terminals of connectors and m do not connect the shielding at the RTD end Accuracy derating according to wiring The error At is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the cable cross section m 2 1 C km for 0 93 mm cross section At C 2x T m 1 C km for 1 92 mm cross section d z
272. ples E all the tests should be carried out with the MV cubicle completely isolated and the MV circuit breaker racked out disconnected and open E all the tests are to be performed in the operating situation no wiring or setting changes even temporary changes to facilitate testing are allowed m the SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software is the basic tool for all Sepam users It is especially useful during Sepam commissioning tests The tests described in this document are systematically based on the use of that tool The commissioning tests may be performed without the SFT2841 software for Sepam units with advanced UMIs Method For each Sepam m only carry out the checks suited to the hardware configuration and the functions activated A comprehensive description of all the tests is given further on m use the test sheet provided to record the results of the commissioning tests Checking of current and voltage input connections The secondary injection tests to be carried out to check the connection of the current and voltage inputs are described according to m the type of current and voltage sensors connected to Sepam in particular for residual current and voltage measurement m the type of injection generator used for the tests three phase or single phase generator The different possible tests are described further on by m a detailed test procedure m the connection diagram of the associated test generator The tab
273. pproximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vnp Unp 3 the value indicated for the phase displacement gO VO 10 between the I0 current and VO voltage is approximatelyequal to 0 m turn the generator off PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 7 31 Commissioning C Fi BL See dini 5 mir MT11194 Gees nea aa za eas os oe oma ral UN a a a m D O o C a m mi do o o Z I ry imga Input output indicator status screen BO ee ee ine kem ie Z a IEUS aL ee IA oe Ce mem ee ee el MT11195 PRE EI LAKE es topa ms ar r emar mn me ma LI oaza inam za au ee at ee oe om I es Sabino cure ta bd ba brem Bamia m fH F gl wee i e a mi r ia Mhi a m Se r rig Ce semi prir Sepam diagnosis and output relay test screen 7 32 Checking of logic input and output connection Checking of logic input connection Procedure Proceed as follows for each input m if the input supply voltage is present use an electric cord to short circuit the contact that delivers logic data to the input m if the input supply voltage is not present apply a voltage supplied by the DC voltage generator to the terminal of the contact linked to the chosen input being sure to comply with the suitable polarity and level m observe the change of status of the input using the SFT2841 softw
274. r the latching of indications on the front panel of Sepam without latching of the trip output O1 LATCH V1 V2 V1 P50 51 1 1 OR P50 51_3_1 tripping units 1 and 3 of protection 50 51 V2 P50 51 2 1 OR P50 51 4 1 tripping units 2 and 4 of protection 50 51 V1 and V2 must be configured in the matrix to control 2 front panel signal lamps m circuit breaker tripping if input 113 is present for more than 300 ms V TRIPCB TON 113 300 m life line mode example 1 If work is underway with the power on indicated by input 125 and the user wishes to change the relay behavior as follows 1 circuit breaker tripping by the instantaneous outputs of protection functions 50 51 unit 1 or 50N 51N unit 1 AND if input 125 is present 2 Recloser inhibition P79_1_113 125 m life line mode example 2 The user wishes to inhibit protection functions 50N 51N and 46 by an input 124 P50N 51N 1 113 124 P46_1_113 124 m validation of a 50N 51N protection function by logic input 121 An 50N 51N protection function set with a very low set point must only trigger tripping of the circuit breaker if it is validated by an input The input comes from a relay which accurately measures the current in the neutral point V TRIPCB P50N 51N 1 3 AND 121 m inhibition of circuit breaker closing if thermal alarm set points are overrun The temperature protection function 38 49T supplies 16 alarm bits If one of the first three bits is activated t
275. re to be measured by RTD 8 If other applications is chosen in the RTD assignment table T2 is not estimated Two measurements are available one for each thermal operating rate of the monitored equipment Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the CA key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 5 to 600 mn Unit mn Resolution 1 mn Accuracy 5 Display format 3 significant digits PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 2 17 Machine operation assistance functions 2 18 Operating time before tripping Waiting time after tripping Remaining operating time before overload tripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function It depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 999 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 mn Refresh interval 1 second typical Waiting time after overload tripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function It depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing th
276. remote setting function is inhibited 8 DE 5 27 Modbus communication 5 28 Access to remote settings Reply frame The reply sent back by Sepam is the same as the remote reading reply frame It fits into a zone with a maximum length of 125 words at the address 1E00h or 2000h and is composed of the effective settings of the function following a semantic check 1E00h 1E7Ch 2000h 207Ch B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 Bog Bos Bo7 Bo6 Bo5 B04 Bo3 Bo2 B01 Boo Function code Unit number Settings This zone is read by a read n words operation function 3 at the address 1E00h or 2000h The length of the exchange may concern m first word only validity test m maximum size of the zone 125 words m usable size of the zone determined by the function being addressed However reading must always begin at the first word in the zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address The first word in the zone function code and unit number has the same values as those described for the remote reading reply frame m xxyy with O function code xx different from 00 and FFh o unit number yy different from FFh The settings are available and confirmed The word is a copy of the reguest frame The zone contents remain valid until the next reguest is made m 0000h no request frame has yet been formulated This is espcially
277. rent in the busbar direction Examples of parallel incomer protection function setting Protection by Sepam S42 m logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 Do not assign any inputs to blocking reception 2 O3 send blocking information BI1 m protection function 67 unit 1 tripping direction line instantaneous output send blocking information BI1 time delayed output inhibited by receipt of BI1 on 113 m protection function 67 unit 2 tripping direction line time delayed output tripping of circuit breaker triggered by fault upstream from incomer not inhibited since no input is assigned to blocking reception 2 Protection by Sepam T42 m logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 O3 send blocking information BI1 m protection function 67 unit 1 tripping direction lt line instantaneous output send blocking information BI1 time delayed output tripping of circuit breaker triggered by a fault upstream from the incomer not inhibited by the receipt of BI1 on 113 m protection function 67 unit 2 if necessary PCRED301006EN June 2005 HA Merlin Gerin 4 13 Control and monitoring functions 4 14 2 by selected protection functions delayed outputs Disturbance recording triggering Description The recording of analog and logic signals may be triggered by different events according to control m
278. rior to commissioning The parameter and protection setting files prepared in disconnected mode will be downloaded later to the Sepam units in connected mode m To create a new parameter and protection setting file click on the icon a for the relevant Sepam family Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 or Sepam series 80 m To open an existing parameter and protection setting file click on the icon E for the relevant Sepam family Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 or Sepam series 80 Using SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit Connected mode to a single Sepam unit is used during commissioning m to upload download and modify Sepam parameters and settings m to have all the measurements and supporting data available for commissioning The PC loaded with the SFT2841 software is connected to the connector port on the front panel of the Sepam via an RS 232 port using the CCA783 cord To open the parameter and protection setting file on the Sepam once it is connected to the PC click on the icon om Using SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network Connected mode to a Sepam network is used during operation m to manage the protection system m to check the status of the electrical distribution system m to diagnose any incident occurring on the electrical distribution system The PC loaded with the SFT2841 software is connected to a group of Sepam units via a communication network connection via serial link telephone li
279. roadcasting guestion Tr lt 15 ms Tr lt 15 ms Synchronization of exchanges Any character that is received after a silence of more than 3 characters is considered as the beginning of a frame A silence of at least 3 characters must be left on the line between two frames Example at 9600 bauds this time is equal to approximately 3 milliseconds PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus protocol Protocol principle MT10203 reply request slave master Exchanges are initiated by the master and include a request by the master and a reply by the slave Sepam Requests by the master are either addressed to a given Sepam identified by its number in the first byte of the request frame or addressed to all the Sepam broadcasting MT10204 slave broadcasting Slave master Broadcast commands are necessarily write commands No replies are transmitted by the Sepam MT10524 master reguest reply Slave It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of the protocol unless the master is a central computer which reguires the corresponding programming All Modbus exchanges include 2 messages a reguest by the master and a reply by the Sepam All the frames t
280. rom 10 ms to 35 ms Characteristic times Operation time lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 90 ms Reset time lt 80 ms 1 Sn v3 Unp in 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 9 MT11167 Protection functions overpower reverse power Operating zone 3 10 Directional reactive overpower ANSI code 320 40 Operation This protection function is used to detect field loss on synchronous machines generators or motors connected to the network In both cases the machine undergoes additional temperature build up which may damage it It picks up if the reactive power flowing in one direction or the other supplied or absorbed is greater than the Qs set point It includes a definite time delay T It is based on the two wattmeter method The function is only enabled if the following condition is met Q z 3 1 P which provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event of short circuits The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or incomer parameter iaccording to the convention m for the feeder circuit o power exported by the busbar is positive O power supplied to the busbar is negative gt MT11183 j flow direction m for the incomer circuit O power supplied to the busbar is positive o power exported by the busbar is negative flow direction This protection function operates for V1V2V3 U21 U32 and U21 U32 VO connections To operate with
281. rop out difference 0 25 Hz 0 1 Hz Vs set point Setting 20 Unp to 50 Unp Accuracy 2 Resolution 1 Restraint on frequency variation Setting With without dFs dt set point 1 Hz s to 15 Hz s Accuracy 1 Hz s Resolution 1 Hz s Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 40ms Reset time lt 50 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 53 Protection functions Operation time depends on the type of protection phase current earth fault current Operation is represented by a characteristic curve m t f l curve for the phase overcurrent function m t f lO curve for the earth fault function The rest of the document is based on t f I the reasoning may be extended to other variables 10 The curve is defined by m type standard inverse very inverse extremely inverse m current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve m time delay T which corresponds to the operation time for 10 Is These 3 settings are made chronologically in the following order type Is current time delay T Changing the time delay T setting by x changes all of the operation times in the curve by x Examples of problems to be solved Problem 1 Knowing the type of IDMT determine the Is current and time delay T settings Theor
282. rotection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 8 E m m 96 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 8 E m m PCRED301006EN June 2005 5 18 8 ETC Communication Modbus Data addresses and encoding Address word 0107 TS97 to TS112 Bit address 1070 to 107F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 97 Recloser in service E m 98 Recloser in progress E m 99 Recloser final trip mn m 100 Recloser successful reclosing un m 101 Send blocking input 1 E E E E NM NM M 102 Remote setting inhibited E E E E E NM M 103 Remote control inhibited E E E E E NM M 104 Sepam not reset after fault E E E E E NM M 105 TC position discrepancy E E E E E NM M 106 Matching fault or Trip Circuit Supervision E E E E E NM M 107 Disturbance recording stored E E E E NM NM M 108 Control fault E E E E E 8 M 109 Disturbance recording inhibited E E E E E NM M 110 Thermal protection inhibited E E E E E NM M 111 MET148 1 module sensor fault E E E m 112 MET148 2 module sensor fault E E un m Address word 0108 TS113 to TS128 Bit address 1080 to 108F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 113 Thermistor tripping E E E E NM NM M 114 Thermistor alarm E E E NM E 8 M 115 External tripping 1 E E E E E NM M 116 External tripping 2 E E E E E E M 117 External tripping 3 E E E E E NM M 118 Buchholz tripping im 119 Thermostat tripping E im 120 Pressure tripping
283. rotection function 50N 51N and can therefore be easily coordinated with that function The residual current is the current measured at the Sepam 10 input or calculated using the sum of the phase currents according to the parameter setting The time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves below The protection function includes a timer hold delay T1 for the detection of restriking faults The tripping direction may be set at the busbar end or line end tripping zone IsO set point Definite time protection IsO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay DE50398 Tripping characteristic of protection 67N type 2 IDMT protection The IDMT protection function operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards yo type 1 DE52321 1 12 10 20 l0 IsO The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Iso The tripping time for 10 IsO values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT ou LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC temps inverse SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC v
284. rt inhibit time delay Operation The time delay is calculated by the number of starts protection function If the number of starts protection function indicates that starting is inhibited the time given represents the waiting time before starting is allowed Readout The number of starts and waiting time may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 360 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 mn Refresh interval 1 second typical 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Switchgear diagnosis functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Cumulative breaking current and number of operations Cumulative breaking current Operation This function gives the cumulative breaking current in kA for five current ranges It is based on measurement of the fundamental component The current ranges displayed are m O lt l lt 2lin m 2in lt l lt 5In m 5SiIn lt l lt 10ln m 10In lt I lt 40In m gt 40ln This function gives the cumulative breaking current in kA for five current ranges Each value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information Number of operations The function also gives the total number of breaking device operations It is activated by tripping orders O1 relay
285. s The tripping time for I Is values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m if gt 40 In tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In In current transformer rated current defined when the general settings are made Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is time delayed output gt Is pick up signal l l 1 MT10541 Lo i tripping value of internal time delay counter k l T1 8 DE 3 39 Protection functions 1 In reference conditions IEC 602
286. s amp phase 2 9 instantaneous 0 8 Is phase 3 instantaneous 0 8 Is OD inst output 0 8 Is for closed ring logic discrimination Setting of tripping logic k O one out of three H two out of three Grouping of output data PCRED301006EN June 2005 MT10911 DE52320 Protection functions Tripping logic In certain cases it is wise to choose a tripping logic of the two out of three phases type Such cases may occur when two parallel transformers Dy are being protected For a 2 phase fault on a transformer primary winding there is a 2 1 1 ratio current distribution at the secondary end The highest current is in the expected zone operation zone for the faulty incomer no operation zone for the fault free incomer One of the lowest currents is at the limit of the zone According to the line parameters it may even be in the wrong zone There is therefore a risk of tripping both incomers Time delay Definite time protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay Definite time protection principle IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards IDMT protection principle PCRED301006EN June 2005 Ws Directional phase overcurrent ANSI code 67 The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 I
287. s current or voltage input connectors and cords come in separate packages To identify a Sepam check the 2 labels on the right side panel of the base unit which describe the product s functional and hardware features m hardware reference and designation _ 59600 lt sepam basic UMI 24 250 V E sepam IHM de base 24 250 V User Machine Interface model Origin France il O M TU IT Ain ia a sooo 50600 ML DONNU UIE S10 MX XXX JXX XAT Schneider amp Electric serial number m software reference and designation Substation Sous station S 40 59680 lt Type of application 59609 lt Operating language DE52313 English French C04 I I TM TINT Additional OO DIE OJ ac information S10 XX S40 X33 XXX Schneider PP Electric Identification of accessories The accessories such as optional modules current or voltage connectors and connection cords come in separate packages identified by labels m example of MES114 module identification label 59646 Serial No 0304169 10 inputs 4 outputs 24 250 V DC Origin France CE 10 entr es 4 sorties 24 250 V CC c23 MES114 s esa on ka MOULA NENNEN M 03146134FA Schneid opogider Part number DE52259 Commercial reference PCRED301006EN June 2005 Installation Equipment identification List of Sepam series 40 references Reference 59600 Designation Base unit with basic UMI 24 25
288. s set point m it includes a definite time delay T m with phase to neutral operation it indicates the faulty phase in the alarm associated with the fault Block diagram U21 or V1 lt Us or Vs DE52310 U32 or V2 lt Us or Vs P time delayed output U13 or V3 lt Us or Vs pick up signal Characteristics Us or Vs set point Setting 50 Unp or Vnp to 150 Unp or Vnp Accuracy 1 2 or 0 005 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 1 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 135 Unp with VT 230 v3 Connnection conditions Type of connection V1 V2 V3 U21 U21 U32 U21 VO U21 U32 VO Phase to neutral Yes No No No Yes operation Phase to phase Yes on U21 only Yes on U21 only Yes operation 3 34 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions Neutral voltage displacement ANSI code 59N Operation The protection function picks up if the residual voltage VO is above a VsO set point gt gt gt gt with VO V1 V24 V3 m it includes a definite time delay T m the residual voltage is either calculated from the 3 phase voltages or measured by an ex
289. s measured The adjusted set point Is is defined by the following equation Is 4U ax a 0 2 I lt MT11030 Definite time protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA MT10211 Definite time protection principle IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards MT10222 IDMT protection principle 3 32 Voltage restrained phase overcurrent ANSI code 50V 51V The IsO setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 IsO The tripping time for l0 IsO values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions a ao o af a a a a The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function
290. s per hour Function number 0701 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 Reserved 3 Activity OD 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Period of time Hours 7 Total number of starts 1 8 Number of consecutive hot starts 1 9 Number of consecutive starts 1 10 Time delay between starts Minutes 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN June 2005 Access to remote settings ANSI 67 Directional phase overcurrent Function number 21xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity OD 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Group A direction O line 1 busbar 7 Group A characteristic angle 0 30 angle 1 45 angle 2 60 angle 8 Group A tripping logic 0 one out of three 1 two out of three 9 Group A tripping curve 10 Group A Is set point O 1A 11 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 12 Group A timer hold curve 13 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 Reserved 18 Group B direction 0 line 1 busbar 19 Group B characteristic angle 0 30 angle 1 45 angle 2 60 angle 20 Group B tripping logic 0 10n3 1 20n3 21 Group B tripping curve 22 Group B Is set point 0 1A 23 Group B
291. s the S key to confirm the entry then press the key for access to the following field m all of the values entered are only effective after the user confirms by selecting the apply box at the bottom of the screen and presses the amp key 8 Merlin Gerin _ PCRED301006EN June 2005 Use Default parameters all applications Hardware configuration identification Sepam xxxx model MX MES module absent MET modules absent MSA module absent DSM module present ACE module absent Output parameter setting m outputs used O1 to 04 m shunt trip units O1 O3 m undervoltage trip units O2 04 m impulse mode no latched Program logic m circuit breaker control yes m logic discrimination no m recloser no m logic input assignment not used General characteristics m network freguency 50 Hz m group of settings A m enable remote setting no m working language English type of cubicle feeder except G40 incomer CT rating 5 A number of CTs 3 11 12 13 rated current In 630 A basic current Ib 630 A integration period 5 mn residual current none rated primary voltage Unp 20 kV rated secondary voltage Uns 100 V voltages measured by VTs U21 U32 residual voltage none disturbance recording 9 x 2 second blocks pre trig for disturbance recording 36 periods Protection functions m all the protections are off m the settings comprise values and choices that are informative a
292. sable the protection units on b5 5i b gt 5iN b gt 5IN ext 0 off jlon Trip MT10811 Off 50 51 On O inverse Threshold 110A Delay 100 ms rey TIET The wrench key is used to enter the passwords for access to the different modes m protection setting m parameter setting and return to operating mode with no passwords MT10808 passwords m s O A Note for parameter setting of signal lamps and output relays it is necessary to use the SFT2841 software program logic menu 7 16 8 Merlin Gerin _ PCRED301006EN June 2005 Use Advanced UMI Blue keys for parameter and protection setting key The key is used to confirm the protection settings parameter settings and passwords on b5 eS b gt 5iN b gt gt SIN ext YOoff jlon Trip MT10812 Off O 50 51 On Trip Curve Si Threshold 550A Delay 600 ms key When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status protection or alarm menu the 4 key is used to move the cursor upward on b5 b 5i b gt 5IN b gt gt 5IN ext 0 off jlon Trip MT10813 General settings I O test key When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status protection or alarm menu the v key is used to move the cursor downward MT10814 Metering A PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 7 17 MT10816 MT10817
293. sed to protect eguipment motors transformers generators lines capacitors against overloads based on measurement of the current consumed Operation curve The protection gives a trip order when the heat rise E calculated according to the measurement of an eguivalent current leg is greater than the set point Es The greatest permissible continuous current is Ib Es The protection tripping time is set by the time constant T m the calculated heat rise depends on the current consumed and the previous heat rise state m the cold curve defines the protection tripping time based on zero heat rise m the hot curve defines the protection tripping time based on 100 nominal heat rise 10 10 107 102 108 0 5 10 Cold curve len e T ea 15 Es Hot curve l 2 de Ln e E yes Alarm set point tripping set point Two set points may be set for heat rise m Es1 alarm m Es2 tripping Hot state set point When the function is used to protect a motor this fixed set point is designed for detection of the hot state used by the number of starts function The value of the fixed set point is 50 Heat rise and cooling time constants MT10420 Heat rise time constant PCR ED301006EN June 2005 T2 t Cooling time constant Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS For self ventilated rotating machines cooling is more effective when the machine is running than when it is stopped
294. sence of negative sequence current is detected when li lt 5 In Isi m time delay T1 is 1 s These default settings ensure the stability of the VT supervision function in the event of short circuits or transient phenomena on the network The Isi set point may be raised for highly unbalanced networks Time delay T2 for the detection of the loss of all voltages must be longer than the time it takes for a short circuit to be cleared by the protection function 50 51 or 67 to avoid the detection of a VT loss of voltage fault triggered by a 3 phase short circuit The time delay for the 51V protection function must be longer than the T1 and T2 time delays used for the detection of voltage losses Characteristics Validation of the detection of partial loss of phase voltages Setting Yes No Vsi set point Setting 2 to 100 of Vnp Accuracy 2 for Vi z 10 Vnp 5 for Vi lt 10 Vnp Resolution 1 Pick up drop out ratio 95 2 5 for Vi z 10 Vnp Isi set point Setting 5 to 100 of In Accuracy 5 Resolution 1 Pick up drop out ratio 105 2 5 Time delay T1 partial loss of phase voltages Setting 0 1 s to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Validation of the detection of the loss of all phase voltages Setting Yes No Detection of the loss of all voltages with verification of the presence of current Setting Yes No Time delay T2 loss of all voltages Settin
295. ss than 50 m long m sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam maximum length 2 m m cable cross section between 0 93 mm AWG 18 and 2 5 mm AWG 13 m resistance per unit length less than 100 mQ m m minimum dielectric strength 100 Vrms Connect the ACE990 connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible 2 cm maximum to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means 6 17 PE50476 Installation 10 input 4 output MES1 14 module 6 18 MES114 modules Function The 4 outputs included on the Sepam series 20 and 40 may be extended by adding an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs available in 3 versions m MES114 10 DC inputs voltage from from 24 V DC to 250 V DC m MES114E 10 inputs voltage 110 125 V AC or V DC m MES114F 10 inputs voltage 220 250 V AC or V DC Characteristics Weight 0 28 kg Operating 25 C to 70 C temperature Environmental Same characteristics as Sepam base units characteristics Voltage 24 to 110 to 110 VAC 220 to 220 to 250 V DC 125 V DC 250 V DC 240 VAC Range 19 2 to 88 to 88 to 176 to 176to 275 V DC 150 VV DC 132 VAC 275 VDC 264VAC Freguency 47 to 63Hz 47 to 63 Hz Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3mA 3 mA Typical switchin
296. ssible to adapt the protection characteristics to suit the electrical environment of the application change of earthing system transition to local production The switching of settings is global and therefore applies to all the units of the protection functions mentioned above The setting switching mode is determined by parameter setting m switching according to the position of logic input 113 0 group A 1 group B m switching by remote control TC3 TC4 m forced group A or group B Block diagram Group A forced DE50487 Choice via input 113 Input 113 Group A Choice via remote control Group A TC3 Group B TC4 Group B forced Choice via input 113 Input 113 Choice via remote control Group B TC4 Group A TC3 PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 4 15 Control and monitoring functions Events may be indicated on the front panel of Sepam by m appearance of a message on the display of the advanced UMI m lighting up of one of the 9 yellow signal lamps Functions Phase overcurrent Local indication ANSI code 30 Message type indication Predefined messages All the messages connected to the standard Sepam functions are predefined and available in two language versions m in English factory messages not modifiable m in the local language according to the version delivered The language version is chosen at the time of S
297. systems the protection function operates according to two different types of characteristics i e a choice of m type 1 the protection function uses 10 vector projection m type 2 the protection function uses 10 vector magnitude m type 3 the protection function uses 10 vector magnitude according to the Italian ENEL DK5600 specification Type 1 operation The function determines the projection of the residual current 10 on the characteristic line the position of which is set by the setting of characteristic angle 00 in relation to the residual voltage The projection value is compared to the IsO set point The projection method is suitable for radial feeders in resistive isolated or compensated neutral systems With compensated neutral systems it is characterized by its capacity to detect very brief repetitive faults recurrent faults In the case of Petersen coils with no additional resistance fault detection in steady state operating conditions is not possible due to the absence of active zero sequence current The protection function uses the transient current at the beginning of the fault to ensure tripping The 60 0 setting is suitable for compensated neutral systems When this setting is selected the parameter setting of the sector is used to reduce the protection tripping zone to ensure its stability on fault free feeders The protection function operates with the residual current measured at the relay l0 input operation
298. tab double click on the event to be linked to a new message select the new predefined or personalized message from among the messages presented and Assign it to the event The same message may be assigned to several events with no restriction Message display in SFT2841 m the predefined messages are stored in Sepam s memory and appear written out in text format in connected mode in code number format in unconnected mode m the personalized messages are saved with the other Sepam parameters and protection settings and are displayed written out in text format in connected and unconnected modes Message processing on the advanced UMI display When an event occurs the related message appears on the advanced UMI display clear The user presses the key to clear the message and be able to consult all the advanced UMI screens in the normal fashion The user must press the ey key to acknowledge latched events e g protection outputs The list of messages remains accessible in the alarm history BM key in which the last 16 messages are stored The last 250 messages may be consulted with the SFT2841 software To delete the messages stored in the alarm history m display the alarm history on the advanced UMI clear m press the Way key Signal lamp type indication The 9 yellow signal lamps on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the following events
299. tchgear opening and closing and thus risk the safety of people and installations are protected by the Sepam password In addition to this protection the E LANs and S LANs must be designed as private networks protected from external actions by all suitable methods 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50590 Use Configuration window for the communication network via telephone modem PCRED301006EN June 2005 SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Link via telephone modem The Sepams are connected to an RS 485 multidrop network using an industrial PSTN modem This modem is the called modem It must first be configured either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual The PC may use an internal or an external modem This modem on the PC side is always the calling modem It must be installed and configured in accordance with the Windows modem installation procedure Configuration of the calling modem in SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network SFT2841 displays the list of all the modems installed on the PC The communication parameters to be defined are m modem select one of the modems listed by SFT2841 telephone no no of the remote modem to be called speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds parity none not adjustable handshake n
300. ternal VT m the protection function operates for connections V1V2V3 U21U32 VO and U21 VO Block diagram V1 8 v2 x v3 a ee VO gt Vso time delayed output external VT pick up signal Characteristics Vs0 set point Setting 2 Unp to 80 Unp if Vnso 2 sum of 3Vs 2 Unp to 80 Unp if Vnso Unsv3 5 Unp to 80 Unp if Vnso Uns V3 Accuracy 2 or 0 002 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 1 or gt 1 0 001 Unp Vs0 x 100 Temporisation T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Vnso is one of the general settings PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 3 35 Protection functions Starts per hour ANSI code 66 Operation This function is three phase It picks up when the number of starts reaches the following limits m maximum number of starts Nt allowed per period of time P m maximum allowed number of consecutive hot starts Nh m maximum allowed number of consecutive cold starts Nc Starting is detected when the current consumed becomes greater than 10 of the Ib current The number of consecutive starts is the number starts counted during the last P Nt minutes Nt being the number of starts allowed per period The motor hot state corresponds to
301. terval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp v3 Positive sequence voltage Operation This function gives the calculated value of the positive sequence voltage Vd Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the A key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp Unit V or kV Accuracy 2 at Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp v3 2 7 Metering functions Negative sequence voltage Frequency Negative sequence voltage Operation This function gives the calculated value of the negative sequence voltage Vi Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp Unit V or kV Accuracy 2 at Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp V3 Frequency Operation This function gives the frequency value Frequency is measured via the following m based on U21 if only one phase to phase voltage is connected
302. the case when Sepam is energized The other words are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant m xxFFh with the function code xx different from 00 and FFh The read request for the settings of the designated function is not valid The function is not included in the particular Sepam or access to settings is impossible in both read and write modes 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication Access to remote settings Description of settings Data format All the settings are transmitted in signed 32 bit integer format encoding as a complement of 2 Particular setting value 7FFF FFFFh means that the setting is out of the validity range CD The Enabled or Disabled setting is encoded as follows 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The tripping curve setting is encoded as follows 0 definite 1 inverse 9 IEC VIT B 2 long time inverse 10 IEC EIT C 3 very inverse 11 IEEE Mod inverse 4 extremely inverse 12 IEEE Very inverse 5 ultra inverse 13 IEEE Extr inverse 6 RI 14 IAC inverse 7 IEC SIT A 15 IAC very inverse 8 IEC LTI B 16 IAC extr inverse The timer hold delay curve setting is encoded as follows 0 definite time 1 IDMT The H2 restraint variable is encoded as follows 0 H2 restraint 1 n
303. the current for cosq 1 90 connection angle A phase current vector plane is divided into two half planes that correspond to the line zone and busbar zone The characteristic angle 0 is the angle of the perpendicular to the boundary line between the 2 zones and the polarization value Voltage memory Should all the voltages disappear during a 3 phase fault near the busbar the voltage level may be insufficient for the fault direction to be detected lt 1 5 Unp The protection function therefore uses a voltage memory to reliably determine the direction The fault direction is saved as long as the voltage level is too low and the current is above the Is set point Closing due to a pre existing fault If the circuit breaker is closed due to a pre existing 3 phase fault on the busbar the voltage memory is blank As a result the direction cannot be determined and the protection does not trip In such cases a backup 50 51 protection function should be used PCRED301006EN June 2005 Directional phase overcurrent ANSI code 67 MT11128 gt U32 Three phase function polarization currents and voltages line DE50667 busbar zone Fault tripping in line zone with 30 line 8 Zone l1 busbar a zone al busbar 0 45 zone U32 busbar zone U13 zone Fault tripping in line zone with 45 DE50669 busbar zone U13 Fault tripping in line zone with 60 8 DEL 3 37
304. the operation of the ACE interface You can use the following to check that an ACE interface is operating correctly m the indicator LEDs on the front panel of the ACE m the information provided by the SFT2841 software connected to Sepam o on the Diagnosis screen o on the Communication configuration screens Link activity LED for ACE949 2 ACE959 and ACE937 The link activity LED for ACE949 2 ACE959 and ACE937 interfaces flashes when Sepam transmission or reception is active Indicator LEDs on the ACE969 m green on LED ACE969 energized red key LED ACE969 interface status LED off ACE969 configured and communication operational LED flashing ACE969 configuration error or ACE969 not configured LED on ACE969 error link activity LED S LAN Tx flashing Sepam transmission active link activity LED S LAN Rx flashing Sepam reception active BEOQCOG Diagnosis using SFT2841 software Sepam diagnosis screen When connected to Sepam the SFT2841 software informs the operator of the general Sepam status and of the Sepam communication status in particular All Sepam status information appears on the Sepam diagnosis screen Sepam communication diagnosis The operator is provided with the following information to assist with identifying and resolving communication problems m name of the protocol configured m Modbus interface version number m number of valid frames received CPT9 m number of invalid mistaken frames received C
305. the outgoing circuit power exported by the busbar is positive power supplied to the busbar is negative x MT10168 direction of flow m for the incoming circuit power supplied to the busbar is positive power exported by the busbar is negative direction y of flow Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option 1 Choice to be set in the general settings MT10179 Characteristics Active power P Reactive power Q Measurement range 1 5 Sn at 999 MW 1 1 5 Sn at 999 Mvar Unit kW MW kvar Mvar Accuracy 1 typical 2 1 typical 2 Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 kW 0 1 kvar Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 second typical Apparent power S Measurement range 1 5 Sn at 999 MVA 1 Unit kVA MVA Accuracy 1 typical Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 kVA Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Sn V3 Unp In 2 At In Unp cos 4 gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 8 DEL 2 9 MT 10257 MT10258 Metering functions 2 10 Peak demand active and reactive power Power factor cos 0 Peak demand active and reactive power Operation This function gives th
306. the overshooting of the fixed set point 50 heat rise of the thermal overload function When the motor re accelerates it undergoes a stress similar to that of starting without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of Ib in which case the number of starts is not incremented It is possible however to increment the number of starts when a re acceleration occurs by a logic data input logic input motor re acceleration The stop start time delay T may be used to inhibit starting after a stop until the delay has elapsed Use of circuit breaker closed data In synchronous motor applications it is advisable to connect the circuit breaker closed data to a logic input in order to enable more precise detection of starts If the circuit breaker closed data is not connected to a logic input the detection of a start is not conditioned by the position of the circuit breaker User information The following information is available for the user m the waiting time before a start is allowed m the number of starts still allowed See chapter Machine operation assistance functions Block diagram DE52372 gt inhibit closing logic input CB closed FL 100 ms logic input motor re acceleration thermal alarm hot state Clear Characteristics Period of time P Setting 1 to 6 hour Resolution 1 Nt total number of starts Setting 1to 60 Resolution
307. the value of 1 during the cycle If necessary V1 may be extended using the TOF SR or LATCH functions Maximum number of functions m the total number of delay timers TON and TOF and time taggers PULSE taken together cannot exceed 16 m there is no limit on the number of bistable SR and latching LATCH functions Input variables They come from protection functions or logic inputs They may only appear on the right of the assignment sign m 111 to 114 121 to 126 logic inputs m Pprotection unit data a protection output Example P50 51 2 1 overcurrent protection unit 2 data 1 time delayed output The data numbers are detailed in the table which follows Output variables They are directed to the matrix or to the protection functions or to the program logic functions They may only appear on the left of the assignment sign The output variables should only be used once otherwise the last assignment is taken into account m outputs to the matrix V1 to V10 The outputs are included in the matrix and may therefore control signal lamps relay outputs or messages m outputs to a protection input Pprotection unit data Example P59 1 113 overvoltage protection unit 1 data 113 protection inhibition The data numbers are detailed in the table which follows m outputs to program logic o V TRIPCB circuit breaker tripping by the circuit breaker control function Used to complete circuit breaker tripping conditions and act
308. their incidence in the chain the function or functions related to the programmed or reprogrammed parts of the program logic m according to the selected function or functions inject a current and or apply a voltage that corresponds to a fault m observe the tripping of the breaking device and the operation of the adapted parts of the program logic At the end of all the voltage and current application type checks put the covers back on the test terminal boxes Checking of optional module connection Checking of RTD inputs to the MET148 2 module The temperature monitoring function provided by Sepam T40 T42 M41 and G40 units checks the connection of each RTD that is configured An RTD FAULT alarm is generated whenever one of the RTDs is detected as being short circuted or disconnected absent To identify the faulty RTD or RTDs m display the temperature values measured by Sepam using the SFT2841 software m check the consistency of the temperatures measured the temperature displayed is if the RTD is short circuited T lt 35 C the temperature displayed is if the RTD is disconnected T gt 205 C Checking of analog output connection to the MSA141 module m identify the measurement associated by parameter setting to the analog output using the SFT2841 software m simulate if necessary the measurement linked to the analog output by injection m check the consistency between the value measured by
309. ting MT11028 Front view with cover lifted Right side view x 46 Cut out 6 13 Installation CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs Function na s The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are used for direct g residual current measurement The only difference between them is the diameter 3 P p Due to their low voltage insulation they may only be used on cables 4 f Characteristics 4d s Inner diameter 120 mm 200 mm ly Weight 0 6 kg 1 4 kg Accuracy 5 to 20 C 6 max from 25 C to 70 C oe Transformation ratio 1 470 en Maximum permissible current 20kA 1s e Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs Storage temperature 40 C to 85 C Dimensions 4 horizontal mounting 4 vertical mounting holes 5 holes 5 DE10228 The CSH120 and CSH200 core Dimen A B D E F L balance CTs must be installed on sions insulated cables CSH120 120 164 44 190 76 40 166 62 35 Cables with a rated voltage of more CSH200 200 256 46 274 120 60 257 104 37 than 1000 V must also have an earthed shielding Assembly Group the MV cable or cables in the middle of the core balance CT Use non conductive binding to hold the cables Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage cable shielding earthing cables through the core balance CT DE51678 Assembly on MV cables Assembly on mount
310. ting W h varh O o o o o o o Temperature O o o o Network and machine diagnosis Tripping context um um um um L um L Tripping current Tripl1 Tripl2 Tripl3 TriplO um un un E u un u Unbalance ratio negative seguence current li 5 um um um L um u Phase displacement 90 91 92 g3 E E um E um Disturbance recording um um um um a um Thermal capacity used um L um L Remaining operating time before overload tripping um G um L Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter operating time um L um L Starting current and time Start inhibit time number of starts before inhibition E Switchgear diagnosis Cumulative breaking current um u um um um L Trip circuit supervision O o o o o o o Number of operations operating time charging time o o o o o o o CT VT supervision 60FL Control and monitoring ANSI code Circuit breaker contactor control 94 69 Latching acknowledgement 86 um u E u um Logic discrimination 68 o o o o o o o Switching of groups of settings Annunciation 30 um um E um Logic equation editor um u um um L um Additional modules 8 temperature sensor inputs MET148 2 module 2 O O O O 1 low level analog output MSA141 module o o ja o o o o Logic inputs outputs o o o o o o o MES114 MES114E MES114F 101 40 module Communication interface o o o o o o o ACE949 2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO m standard o accor
311. ting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 80 ms typically 80 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms Reset time lt 50 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN June 2005 Protection functions PCRED301006EN June 2005 Underfrequency ANSI code 81L Operation The function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is below the Fs set point and if the negative sequence voltage is above the Vs set point If a single VT is connected U21 the function picks up when the frequency is below the Fs set point and the U21 voltage is is above the Vs set point It includes a definite time delay T The protection function includes a restraint which may be configured according to the rate of change of frequency which inhibits the protection in the event of a continuous decrease in frequency greater than the inhibition set point This setting avoids the tripping of all the feeders when the busbar is resupplied by remanent motor voltage following the loss of the incomer Block diagram U32 g Vd U21 a setting O without restraint with restraint 1 Or U21 gt Vs if only one VT T 0 eo time delayed output pick up signal Characteristics Fs set point Setting 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz Accuracy 0 02 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Pick up d
312. tion This function gives the phase displacement between the V1 V2 V3 voltages and I1 12 I3 currents respectively in the trigonometric sense see diagram The measurements are used when Sepam is commissioned to check that the voltage and current inputs are wired correctly It does not operate when only the U21 voltage is connected to Sepam Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 359 Resolution 1 Accuracy 2 Refresh interval 2 seconds typical 8 DE 2 15 Network diagnosis functions 2 16 Disturbance recording Operation This function is used to record analog signal and logical states Record storage is activated according to parameter setting by a triggering event see Control and monitoring functions Disturbance recording triggering The stored event begins before the triggering event and continues afterwards The record comprises the following information m values sampled from the different signals m date m characteristics of the recorded channels The duration and number of records may be set using the SFT2841 software tool The files are recorded in FIFO First In First Out type shift storage when the maximum number of records is reached the oldest record is erased when a new record is triggered The
313. tion 50BF E E E E E NM M 40 Protection 32Q E im 41 Protection 51V u 42 TC fault E E E E E M M 43 TP Phase fault E E E E E NM M 44 TP VO fault E E E E E M M 45 Reserved 46 Reserved 47 Reserved 48 Reserved PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merin Gerin 5 17 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Address word 0104 TS49 to TS64 Bit address 1040 to 104F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 49 Reserved 50 Reserved 51 Reserved 52 Reserved 53 Reserved 54 Reserved 55 Reserved 56 Reserved 57 Reserved 58 Reserved 59 Reserved 60 Reserved 61 Reserved 62 Reserved 63 Reserved 64 Reserved Address word 0105 TS65 to TS80 Bit address 1050 to 105F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 65 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 1 E Nm m 66 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 1 E mn m 67 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 2 E mn m 68 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 2 E mn m 69 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 3 E E m 70 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 3 E mn m 71 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 4 E m Mm 72 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 4 E mn m 73 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 5 E mn m 74 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point
314. tion function input and output variables Outputs Instantaneous 1 7 L L m nim m m u ui mi output Pick up Protection 3 m u m m mu m m m m m m m m m m umu m m m m m u output time delayed Drop out 4 L L Instantaneous 6 u output inverse zone Phase 1 faut 7 m E um mw Phase 2 faut 8 m m je Phase 3 faut 9 m um eo Alarm 10 E E Inhibit closing 11 L RTD fault 12 E Locked rotor 13 E Excessive 14 E starting time Locked rotor at 15 E start up Protection 16 m L u m u mi nim m m m m mi m u inhibited Hot state 18 u Positive active 19 a power Negative active 20 L power Instantaneous 21 u output at 0 8 Is Starting in 22 u progress Recloser in 201 service Recloser ready 202 Cleared fault 203 E Final trip 204 L Reclosing 211 cycle 1 Reclosing 212 cycle 2 Reclosing 213 L cycle 3 Reclosing 214 cycle 4 Inputs Reset 101 m m m umu m m m m m iu m m umu m umu m m jm umu m m m m VT fault 103 u Start 50BF 107 Inhibition 113 m u E u u E E m m u u E E u u L u u 1 When the protection function is used for phase to neutral voltage PCRED301006EN June 2005 8 Merlin Gerin 4 21 Control and monitoring functions 4 22 Logic equ
315. ts of the network cable o the network cable must be stripped o the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp m the interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m green fittings m the interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC 8 Merlin Gerin _ PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50023 DE51663 DE52077 Installation 1 70 mm with CCA612 cord connected 4 wire RS 485 network A B JA B Pow 120 er supply r 24 V DC 8 V ACE959 Upu yt g Rx Power supply 4 wire 1 1 Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in RS 485 network Power supply 12 or 24V DC the shielded cable 3 pairs 2 Terminal block for connection of the distributed power supply module PCRED301006EN June 2005 ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface Function The ACE959 interface performs 2 functions m electrical interface between Sepam and a 4 wire RS 485 communication network m main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord Characteristics Weight Assembly Operating temperature 0 2 kg On symmetrical DIN rail 25 C to 70 C Same characteristics as Sepam base units Environmental characteristics Standard Distributed power supply Consumption EIA 4 wire R
316. tting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or from 25 ms to 35 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operating time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 35 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 8 Merin Gerin 3 7 Protection functions Remanent undervoltage ANSI code 27R Operation This protection is single phase m it picks up when the U21 phase to phase voltage is less than the Us set point m the protection includes a definite time delay Block diagram time delayed output MT10875 pick up signal Characteristics Us set point Setting 5 Unp to 100 Unp Accuracy 5 or 0 005 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 104 3 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time lt 40 ms Overshoot time lt 20 ms Reset time lt 30 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 8 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 DE50459 Protection functions reverse power Operating zone PCRED301006EN June 2005 overpower Directional active overpower ANSI code 32P Operation This function may be used as m active overpower protection for energy management load shedding or m reverse active power protection against motors running like generators and generators running like motors It picks up if the active power flowing in
317. twork using one of the three following protocols o IEC 60870 5 103 o DNP3 o RTU Modbus The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting m the E LAN engineering local area network port reserved for Sepam remote parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces that have different S LAN ports m ACE969TP Twisted Pair for connection to an S LAN network using a two wire RS485 connection m ACE969FO Fiber Optic for connection to an S LAN network using a fiber optic connection star or ring The E LAN port is always a two wire RS485 connection 8 EDITH 6 29 Installation 6 30 ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi protocol interfaces Characteristics Technical characteristics Weight 0 285 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Power supply 25 C to 70 C Operating temperature Same characteristics as Sepam base units Power supply Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 240 V AC Range 20 10 20 10 Maximum consumption 2W 3 VA Inrush current lt 10A 100 us Acceptable ripple content 12 Acceptable momentary outages 20 ms Electrical interface Standard EIA 4 wire RS 485 differential Distributed power supply External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 Consumptionn 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA in sending mode Max number of Sepam units 25 Maximum length of 2 wire RS 485 network Number o
318. type sensors See current input connection diagrams 1 ATC 2 turns 5 ATC 4 turns 1 ATC 2 turns 5 ATC 4 turns Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral systems in which very low fault currents need to be detected Setting range from 0 1 InO to 15 Ino with In0 2 A or 5 A or 20 A according to parameter setting The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current m CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 1 A CT make 2 turns through CSH primary m CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 5 A CT make 4 turns through CSH primary m the sensitivity can be multiplied by 10 by parameter setting of InO In 10 Setting range from 0 1 In to 15 In or 0 01 In to 1 5 In with In CT primary current ACE990 PCRED301006EN June 2005 The ACE990 is used as an interface between a MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1 n 50 lt n lt 1500 and the Sepam residual current input This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the installation Setting range from 0 1 InO to 15 InO with InO k n where n n number of core balance CT turns and k factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam with a choice of 20 discrete values from 0 00578 to 0 26316 8 EDITH 6 9 DE51836 DE51837 DE51839 DE51840 Installation 6 10 Bas
319. une 2005 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Diagnosis Diagnosis Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Reserved 0159 Last tripping current Itrip1 015A R 3 4 16NS 10A Last tripping current Itrip2 015B R 3 4 16NS 10A Last tripping current Itrip3 015C R 3 4 16NS 10A Reserved 015D Cumulative breaking current 015E R 3 4 16NS 1 kA Number of operations 015F R 3 4 16NS 1 Operating time 0160 R 3 4 16NS 1 ms Charging time 0161 R 3 4 16NS 0 1 s Running hours counter operation time 0162 R 3 4 16NS 1h Reserved 0163 Thermal capacity used 0164 R 3 4 16NS Time before tripping 0165 R 3 4 16NS 1 min Time before closing 0166 R 3 4 16NS 1 min Negative seguence unbalance 0167 R 3 4 16NS bb Starting time overload 0168 R 3 4 16NS 0 1s Starting current overload 0169 R 3 4 16NS 1A Start inhibit time delay 016A R 3 4 16NS 1 min Number of starts allowed 016B R 3 4 16NS 1 Temperatures 1 to 16 016C 017B R 3 4 16S 1 C External positive active energy Ea ext 017C 017D R 3 4 32NS 100 kW h External negative active energy Ea ext 017E 017F R 3 4 32NS 100 kW h External positive reactive energy Er ext 0180 0181 R 3 4 32NS 100 kvar h External negative reactive energy Er ext 0182 0183 R 3 4 32NS 100 kvar h Learnt cooling time constant T2 49 RMS 0184 R
320. urrent time and the nearest ten second period at the time of the receipt of a synchronization pulse which is adapted to match the synchronization pulse period The synchronization pulse period is determined automatically by Sepam when it is energized based on the first two pulses received the synchronization pulse must therefore be operational before Sepam is energized The synchronization function only operates after Sepam has been time set i e after the disappearance of the incorrect time event Any time changes greater than 4 seconds in amplitude are made by sending a new time frame The switch from summer time to winter time and vice versa is made in this way as well There is a temporary loss of synchronism when the time is changed The external synchronization mode requires additional equipment a synchronization clock to generate a precise periodic synchronization time pulse If Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status and if the difference in synchronism between the nearest ten second period and the receipt of the synchronization pulse is greater than the synchronism error for 2 consecutive synchronization pulses it switches into non synchronous status and generates the appearance of a not synchronous event Likewise if Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status the failure to receive a synchronization pulse for 200 seconds generates the appearance of a not synchronous event 5 25 Modbus communic
321. ved gt 00 NJIJ R Vj N ajo Reserved ANSI 46 Negative seguence unbalance Function number 03xx relay 1 xx lt 01 relay 2 xx lt 02 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity Reserved Reserved Tripping curve Is set point SJN OD oy A j N Tripping time delay co Reserved o Reserved sk Reserved no Reserved PCRED301006EN June 2005 Modbus communication ANSI 47 Negative sequence overvoltage Function number 1901 Access to remote settings Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Vsi set point Unp 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved ANSI 48 51LR 14 Locked rotor excessive starting time Function number 0601 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Is set point Ib 7 Excessive starting time delay 10 ms 8 Locked rotor time delay 10 ms 9 Locked rotor on start time delay 10 ms 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved ANSI 49RMS Thermal overload Function number 0401 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control
322. ved ANSI 81H Overfreguency Function number 13xx relay 1 xx lt 01 relay 2 xx lt 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Fs set point 0 1 Hz 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Vs set point Unp 10 Reserved 11 Reserved ANSI 81L Underfreguency Function number 14xx relay 1 xx lt 01 to relay 4 xx lt 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity OD 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Fs set point 0 1 Hz 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Restraint 0 none 1 on freguency variation 9 Vs set point Unp 10 Inhibited threshold on frequency variation PCRED301006EN June 2005 5 39 Modbus communication 5 40 Access to remote settings Other protection settings ANSI 60 CT supervision Function number 2601 Setting Data Reserved Format Unit Reserved Activity Reserved Reserved Behavior on 46 51N 32P 32Q functions O none 1 inhibition Tripping time delay 10 ms Reserved Reserved Reserved gt 0 ON OD oO A WO Nj ajo Reserved ANSI 60FL VT supervision Function number 2701 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Activity O 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Check loss of 3 V 2 U 7 Test current 8 Use Vi li criterion 9 Behavior on 27 278 2
323. vercurrent ANSI Code 50V 51V gt Is pick up signal I tripping time delay l j L value of internal l counter l j Characteristics Tripping curve Setting Definite time IDMT chosen according to list page 3 32 Is set point Setting Definite time 0 5 In lt Is lt 24 In expressed in Amps IDMT 0 5 In lt Is lt 2 4 In expressed in Amps Resolution 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 1 5 or 0 01 In Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T operation time at 10 Is0 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 In Is x 100 Characteristic times Operation time Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS 2 Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 1 Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5 to 20 s pick up lt 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is for Is gt 0 3 In typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 Is for ls lt 0 3 Ino typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1 0 3 33 Protection functions Overvoltage ANSI code 59 Operation The protection function is single phase and operates with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage m it picks up if one of the voltages concerned is above the Us or V
324. with sum of three currents impossible The protection function is inhibited for residual voltages below the Vs0 set point The time delay is definite time When a memory is added recurrent faults can be detected the memory is controlled by a time delay or by the residual voltage value The tripping direction can be set at the busbar end or line end Block diagram memory reset VO gt Vso vo VO lt VOmem busbar T imas ime St me choice memory pick up signal and to logic discrimination 8 DE 3 41 Protection functions 3 42 Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Definite time operation IsO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay t DE50398 Definite time protection principle Memory The detection of recurrent faults is controlled by the time delay TOmem which extends the transient pick up information thereby enabling the operation of the definite time delay even with faults that are rapidly extinguished 2 ms and restrike periodically Even when a Petersen coil with no additional resistance is used tripping is ensured by fault detection during the transient fault appearance with detection extended throughout the duration of the fault based on the VO z VOmem criterion within the limit of TOmem With this type of application TOmem must be greater than T definite time delay Standard setting The settings below are give
325. work m the master then reads a reply zone designed for checking that the settings have been processed Each function has its own particular reply zone contents They are the same as those of the remote reading function reply frame To use remote setting it is necessary to make all the settings for the function concerned even if some of them have not changed Request frame The request is made by the master using a write n words operation function 16 at the address 1F00h or 2100h The zone to be written contains a maximum of 125 words It contains the values of all the settings and consists of the following 1F00h 2100h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 B08 B07 BO6 BOS B04 BOS BO2 BO1 BOO Function code Unit number Settings The content of the address 2100h may be read using a read n words operation function 3 m the function code field may have the following values 01h to 99h BCD encoding for the list of protection functions F01 to F99 m the unit number field is used as follows for protection functions it indicates the unit involved varying from 1 to N N being the maximum number of units available in the Sepam It may never be egual to 0 Exception reply In addition to the usual cases le Sepam can send type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if m another remote reading or setting request is being processed m the
326. x 10 option 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT et IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 4 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 3 46 Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Characteristics Type 2 Characteristic angle 60 Setting 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Accuracy 3 Tripping direction Setting Busbar line Is0 setting Definite time setting 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 Ind expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 Ind With CSH sensor 2 Arating 0 2Ato 30A 5 A rating 0 5Ato75A 20 A rating 2 Ato 300A CT CSH30 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 InO min 0 1 A Core balance CT with 0 1 In0 lt IsO lt 15 Ino ACE990 Definite time setting 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt Ind expessed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt Ino With CSH sensor 2 Arating 0 2Ato2A 5 A rating O0 5Ato5A 20 A rating 2AtoA CT CSH30 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 1 InO min 0 1 A Core balance CT with 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt Ino ACE990 Resolution 0 1 A or
327. x Ib 1 05 Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 Imax lb 110 Please note if the motor absorbs a current of 1 05 Ib in steady state the heat rise calculated by the thermal overload protection will reach 110 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 I lb 0 95 Knegative 4 5 usual value The other thermal overload parameters do not need to be set They are not taken into account by default Example 2 The following data are available m motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 1 m cooling time constant T2 m maximum steady state current Imax Ib 1 05 Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 Imax lb 110 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 I lb 0 95 The manufacturer s hot cold curves may be used to determine the heating time constant T1 The method consists of placing the Sepam hot cold curves below those of the motor Figure 1 motor thermal resistance and thermal overload tripping curves A Q O ol T time before tripping s A o i motor cold curve 4 Sepam cold curve motor hot curve Sepam hot curve 1 05 2 PCRED301006EN June 2005 gt W Ib Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples For an overload of 2 Ib the value t T1 0 0339 is obtained In order for Sepam to trip at the point 1 t 70 s T1 is equal to 2065 sec 34 min With a setting of T1
328. y Thermal capacity used Temperatures Active power Reactive power Apparent power Power factor Remote setting via communication link Description and dimensions A Terminal block for analog output RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord according to application Grounding earthing terminal 1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m MC if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rc if the module is the last interlinked module Connection Earthing terminal connection By tinned copper braid with cross section z 6 mm or cable with cross section z 2 5 mm and length lt 200 mm equipped with a 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torgue 2 2 Nm Connection of analog output to screw type connector m 1 wire with cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm z AWG 24 12 m or 2 wires with cross section 0 2 to 1 mm z AWG 24 16 Wiring precautions m it is preferable to use shielded cables m use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 PE50127 DE51652 MT10151 Installation DSM303 remote advanced UMI module N a NORO 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 ial B 11 165A rus RA gt 166A avs MO 117 13 167A avs A 8
329. y voltage terminal 1 AC or positive polarity terminal 2 AC or negative polarity m presence of a residual current measurement core balance CT and or additional modules connected to Sepam when applicable m presence of test terminal boxes upstream from the current inputs and voltage inputs m conformity of connections between Sepam terminals and the test terminal boxes Connections Check that the connections are tightened with equipment non energized The Sepam connectors must be correctly plugged in and locked Energizing Switch on the auxiliary power supply Check that Sepam performs the following initialization sequence which lasts approximately 6 seconds m green ON and red indicators on m red indicator off m pick up of watchdog contact The first screen displayed is the phase current measurement screen Implementation of the SFT2841 software for PC m start up the PC m connect the PC RS232 serial port to the communication port on the front panel of Sepam using the CCA783 cord m start up the SFT2841 software by clicking on the related icon m choose to connect to the Sepam to be checked Identification of Sepam m note the Sepam serial number given on the label stuck to the right side plate of the base unit m note the Sepam type and software version using the SFT2841 software Sepam Diagnosis screen m enter them in the test sheet 8 Merlin Gerin PCRED301006EN June 2005 Commissioning PCRED301006EN

Sepam series 40 - ElectricalManuals.net

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents